230
M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN 1 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated environment in which one can do several things? a) Star Office writer b) Star Office Calc c) Star Office Base d) Star Office 2. Star Office writer is a……………… a) Database b) Spreadsheet c) Word processor d) Presentation 3. Entering a new text or modifying the existing text in a document is known as…………. a) Formatting b) Text Editing c) Inserting d) Hanging 4. Star Office was developed by………. a) Lotus Corporation b) Sun Micro System c)AT&T d) Micro Soft 5. Which is used to create text documents? a) Star office Draw b) Star Base c) Star office Impress d) Star Office writer 6. Which is used to create spreadsheet…? a) Star office writer b) Star office Calc c) Star office Base d) Star office Impress 7. Which is used to create presentations? a) Star office Draw b) Star Base c) Star office Impress d) Star Office Calc 8. Which is used to create draw? a) Star office writer b) Star office Calc c) Star office Draw d) Star office Impress 9. Which is used to create database? a) Star office Base b) Star office Calc c) Star office Impress d) Star office Calc 10. Star Office use a own desktop is called as? a) windows desktop b) Star Desktop c) Table Desktop d) New Desktop 11. Which command is used to create new document? a) FileText b) FileNewText Document c) NewFileText Document d) File New 12. The flashing vertical bar is called……. a) Pointer b) Insertion Point c) Cursor d) Horizontal pointer 13. A document may contain……….. a) Table b) Text c) Graphs d) All of these 14. Which is not a word processor? a) Word pro b) Word Star c) MS-Word d) Lotus 1-2-3 15. As the characters are typed they appear on the screen and flashing vertical bar called……….. a) Mouse pointer b) pointer c) Insertion Point d) Insertion Bar 16. Which key is not must be pressed at the end of the each line? a) Tab b) Enter c) Shift d) Alt 17. Which key is used to create blank line or new paragraph? a) Enter b) Tab c) Ctrl d) Backspace 18. Which command is used to save? a) FileSave b) EditSave c) ViewSave d) View Save as 19. Which command is used to close the documents? a) FileClose b) EditClose c) ViewClose d) File Shut 20. Which command is used to reopen a document that has been saved and closed? a) EditOpen b) FileOpen c) ViewOpen d) Format Open CHAPTER 1: AN INTRODUCTION TO STAR OFFICE

Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 1 Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

  • Upload
    others

  • View
    1

  • Download
    0

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

1 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

Volume-I [Star Office]

1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated environment in which one can do several things? a) Star Office writer b) Star Office Calc c) Star Office Base d) Star Office

2. Star Office writer is a……………… a) Database b) Spreadsheet c) Word processor d) Presentation

3. Entering a new text or modifying the existing text in a document is known as…………. a) Formatting b) Text Editing c) Inserting d) Hanging

4. Star Office was developed by………. a) Lotus Corporation b) Sun Micro System c)AT&T d) Micro Soft

5. Which is used to create text documents? a) Star office Draw b) Star Base c) Star office Impress d) Star Office writer

6. Which is used to create spreadsheet…? a) Star office writer b) Star office Calc c) Star office Base d) Star office Impress

7. Which is used to create presentations? a) Star office Draw b) Star Base c) Star office Impress d) Star Office Calc

8. Which is used to create draw? a) Star office writer b) Star office Calc c) Star office Draw d) Star office Impress

9. Which is used to create database? a) Star office Base b) Star office Calc c) Star office Impress d) Star office Calc

10. Star Office use a own desktop is called as? a) windows desktop b) Star Desktop c) Table Desktop d) New Desktop

11. Which command is used to create new document? a) File�Text b) File����New����Text Document c) New�File�Text Document d) File� New

12. The flashing vertical bar is called……. a) Pointer b) Insertion Point c) Cursor d) Horizontal pointer

13. A document may contain……….. a) Table b) Text c) Graphs d) All of these

14. Which is not a word processor? a) Word pro b) Word Star c) MS-Word d) Lotus 1-2-3

15. As the characters are typed they appear on the screen and flashing vertical bar called……….. a) Mouse pointer b) pointer c) Insertion Point d) Insertion Bar

16. Which key is not must be pressed at the end of the each line? a) Tab b) Enter c) Shift d) Alt

17. Which key is used to create blank line or new paragraph? a) Enter b) Tab c) Ctrl d) Backspace

18. Which command is used to save? a) File����Save b) Edit�Save c) View�Save d) View� Save as

19. Which command is used to close the documents? a) File����Close b) Edit�Close c) View�Close d) File� Shut

20. Which command is used to reopen a document that has been saved and closed? a) Edit�Open b) File����Open c) View�Open d) Format� Open

CHAPTER 1: AN INTRODUCTION TO STAR OFFICE

Page 2: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

2 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

21. Which shortcut key is used to save the documents? a) Ctrl+B b) Ctrl+S c) Ctrl+A d) Ctrl+X

22. Which shortcut key is used to close the documents? a) Alt+F4 b) Ctrl+F4 c) Ctrl+F9 d) Ctrl+X

23. Which shortcut key is used to reopen the documents? a) Ctrl+A b) Ctrl+S c) Ctrl+O d) Ctrl+X

24. Which denotes the end of documents? a) Insertion point b) Thick Horizontal Line c) Thick Vertical line d) Pointer

25. Which option is used to multiple documents? a) Format b) Window c) Tools d) View

26. The key is used to move the insertion point one character to left? a) Right Arrow b) Left Arrow c) Up Arrow d) Down Arrow

27. The key is used to move the insertion point one character to right? a) Right Arrow b) Left Arrow c) Up Arrow d) Down Arrow

28. The key is used to move the insertion point one word to left? a) Ctrl+Right Arrow b) Ctrl+Left Arrow c) Up Arrow d) Down Arrow

29. The key is used to move the insertion point one word to right? a) Ctrl+left Arrow b) Ctrl+Right Arrow c) Down Arrow d) Up Arrow

30. The key is used to move the insertion point down one line? a) Ctrl+Right Arrow b) Ctrl+Left Arrow c) Up Arrow d) Down Arrow

31. The key is used to move the insertion point up one line? a) Ctrl+left Arrow b) Ctrl+Right Arrow c) Down Arrow d) Up Arrow

32. In a table, the key is used to move the insertion point one cell to the left? a) Tab b) Shift+Tab c) Ctrl+Tab d) Alt+Tab

33. In a table, the key is used to move the insertion point one cell to the right? a) Shift+Tab b)Tab c) Alt+Tab d) Ctrl+Tab

34. The key is used to move the insertion point to the beginning of a line is? a) Home b) End c) Ctrl+End d) Ctrl+Home

35. The key is used to move the insertion point to the end of a line is? a) End b) Home c) Ctrl+Home d) Ctrl+End

36. The key combination is used to move the insertion point to the beginning of a document? a) Home b) End c) Ctrl+End d) Ctrl+Home

37. The key combination is used to move the insertion point to the end of a document? a) Alt+End b) Ctrl+End c) Shift+End d) Home

38. The key is used to move the insertion point up one page? a) Page Up b) Home c) End d) Page Down

39. The key is used to move the insertion point down one page? a) Page Up b) Home c) End d) Page Down

40. Scrolling a document does not move the…………… a) Pointer b) Insertion Point c) Cursor d) Horizontal pointer

41. How many Scroll bars are there in star writer? a) 3 b) 2 c) 4 d) 1

42. Which key is deletes the characters to the left side of the insertion point? a) Space Bar b) Backspace c) Delete d) Shift

43. Which key is deletes the characters to the right side of the insertion point? a) Backspace b) Delete c) Erase d) Alt

44. In which mode the new text is to be inserted and the existing text would move to the right? a) Insert mode b) Type Over c) Erase Mode d) None of these

Page 3: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

3 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

45. In which mode the new text is be inserted and the existing text would disappears? a) Insert mode b) Type Over c) Erase Mode d) None of these

46. Which key is used to toggle between type-over mode and the insert mode? a) Tab b) Alt c) Enter d) Insert

47. Which bar gives the information about the current mode? a) Status bar b) Menu bar c) Object bar d) Tool bar

48. Which key is used to select the text? a) Shift b) Delete c) Insert d) Alt

49. To select entire documents… a) Ctrl+L b) Ctrl+R c) Ctrl+A d) Ctrl+J

50. To select a particular line…………. a) Shift+End b) Ctrl+A c) Ctrl+C d) Alt+A

51. Which command is used to cut the text? a) Edit�Paste b) Edit����cut c) Edit�Copy d) File�Copy

52. Which command is used to copy the text? a) Edit����Copy b) Edit�Paste c) File�Copy d) Tools�Copy

53. Which command is used to paste the text? a) Edit�Cut b) Edit����Paste c) Edit�Copy d) File�Paste

54. Which shortcut key is used to cut the text? a) Ctrl+P b) Ctrl+X c) Ctrl+C d) Ctrl+V

55. Which shortcut key is used to copy the text? a) Ctrl+E b) Ctrl+U c) Ctrl+C d) Ctrl+X

56. Which shortcut key is used to paste the text? a) Ctrl+X b) Ctrl+U c) Ctrl+V d) Ctrl+C

57. Which command is used to find and replace the text? a) Edit����Find and Replace b) Tools�Find and Replace c) Insert�Find and Replace d) View�Find and Replace

58. In the Find & Replace dialog box, which box is used to type text that you want to find? a) Replace b) Search for c) Find d) Find All

59. In the Find & Replace dialog box, the replacement word or phrase should be entered in…………box. a) Replace b) Replace with c) Find d) Find All

60. Which button is used to replace all the instances of the text with what you entered in the replace with box? a) Replace b) Replace All c) Change All d) Search

61. How many text box are there in Find and Replace dialog box? a) 3 b) 2 c) 3 d) 5

62. The thick horizontal line in the page area is called…………. a) End of paragraph marker b) End of Document Marker c) End of pager marker d) End of line marker

63. Which shortcut key is used to open Find& Replace dialog box? a) Ctrl+X b) Ctrl+U c) Ctrl+F d) Ctrl+C

64. Mistakes can be correct by using the…………key? a) Delete b) Backspace c) Both A & B d) None of these

Page 4: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

4 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

1. Which menu is used to achieve all the formatting options? a) Format b) Edit c) Tools d) Insert

2. Which key combination is used to make the select text bold? a) Ctrl+I b) Ctrl+B c) Ctrl+U d) Ctrl+J

3. Which key combination is used to make the select text italic is? a) Ctrl+U b) Ctrl+C c) Ctrl+I d) Ctrl+R

4. Which key combination is used to make the select text underline is? a) Ctrl+I b) Ctrl+C c) Ctrl+E d) Ctrl+U

5. There are……………..types formatting. a) 3 b) 2 c) 1 d) 4

6. Which command is used to achieve all the format options? a) Format����Character b) File�Paragraph c) Foramt�Page d) Paragraph�File

7. Which is a set of characters in a certain style? a) Text b) Fonts c) Documents d) symbols

8. Which font look professional and suited for business documents? a) Arial b) Impact c) Times New Roman d) Fajita

9. Which font is decorative? a) Times New Roman b) Fajita c) Impact d) Arial Black

10. Which font is actually set of symbols? a) Arial b) Fajita c) Impact d) Symbols, windings

11. The size of font is measured in…………. a) Inch b) Points c) Feet d) centimeter

12. There are……….…..points to a Inch? a) 73 b) 71 c) 70 d) 72

13. The document to be printed in a colour using………..printer. a) Line Printer b) Dot Matrix printer c) Laser Printer d) Colour printer

14. Each time………….is pressed, the paragraph options for that paragraph are carried down to the next paragraph? a) Alt b) Ctrl c) Enter d) Home

15. Which can be used to call attention to key idea or points in a documents? a) Text colour b) Highlight c) Font Size d) Font Color

16. Which option should be selected from the colour palette to remove the Highlighting? a) Fill b) No Fill c) Fill No d) No Highlight

17. There are………….paragraph alignments in Star Office Writer? a) 3 b) 2 c) 4 d) 1

18. The default page alignment is……….. a) Left b) Right c) Center d) Justify

19. The keyboard shortcut is used to make the text centered? a) Ctrl+J b) Ctrl+C c) Ctrl+L d) Ctrl+E

20. The keyboard shortcut is used to make the text justified? a) Ctrl+L b) Ctrl+E c) Ctrl+R d) Ctrl+J

21. The keyboard shortcut is used to make the text left? a) Ctrl+E b) Ctrl+L c) Ctrl+J d) Ctrl+R

22. The keyboard shortcut is used to make the text right? a) Ctrl+L b) Ctrl+E c) Ctrl+R d) Ctrl+J

23. Which is used to make a long document easy and inviting to read? a) Indentation b) Highlighting c) Font Size d) Font Color

24. Which option is used to indent the first line of the paragraph? a) Paragraph b) First Line c) First Paragraph d) Line

CHAPTER-2: TEXT FORMATTING

Page 5: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

5 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

25. To indent from the left, type the amount to be indented in the ……………..spin box? a) Before Text b) After Text c) Space d) First Text

26. To indent from the right type the amount to be indented in the…………….spin box? a) Before Text b) After Text c) Space d) First Text

27. When increase indent icon is clicked the paragraph is indented is by…..inch from the left margin. a) ½ b) 1.5 c) 2 d) 0.75

28. The special kind of indent used for numbered list is…. a) right indent b) Left indent c) Hanging Indent d) Numbered

29. If a negative value is specified it will create……… a) right indent b) Left indent c) Hanging Indent d) Numbered

30. If the value of the first line spin box in the paragraph dialog box is negative it will create? a) right indent b) Left indent c) Hanging Indent d) Numbered

31. Which command is used to get Paragraph dialog box? a) Format�Character b) Format����Paragraph c) Foramt�Page d) Paragraph�File

32. Which tab is used to change the line spacing? a) Indents & Spacing b) Line Spacing c) Numbering d) Alignment

33. In Star Office Writer the key pressed to enter a hard return is…………. a) Alt b) Ctrl c) Enter d) Home

34. The default line spacing for star writer documents is………… a) 2 b) 1 c) 3 d) 1.5

35. In Star Office Writer how many different types of line space? a) 5 b) 7777 c) 8 d) 6

36. Which command is used to change line space? a) Format�Character b) Format����Paragraph c) Format�Page d) Paragraph�File

37. Which is used to list the important points and messages? a) Highlight b) Indentation c) Bullets & Numbers d) Line Spacing

38. Which command is used to select various styles for the Bullets & Numbers? a) Format����Bullets and Numbering b) Insert�Bullets c) Insert�Numbers d) Paragraph�File

39. ………..work well for directions or other point’s one to want to present in sequence? a) Highlighting b) Bullets c) Indentation d) Numbered List

40. Bullets and Numbering option available under…..…menu a) File b) E dit c) Format d) Insert

41. How many help systems are there in Star Office 8? a) 5 b) 2 c) 3 d) 4444

42. The command is used to get online help facility is? a) Help����Content b) File�Help c) Help�Online d) Edit�Help

43. Which key is used get Help in Star office writer? a) F2 b) F5 c) F1 d) F7

44. Which of the following is true to change the fonts in Star Office Writer? a) Format����Character b) File�character c) Format�Page d) Paragraph�File

45. One way to set of list points or topic in a document is? a) Highlighting b) Bullets List c) Indentation d) Using Styles

46. The set of defaults for formatting text is called as…….. a) Format b) Style c) Design d) Comment

Page 6: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

6 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

1. In how many ways mistakes can be corrected in Star Office writer?

a) 3 b) 2 c) 4 d) 1 2. Star Office Writer compares each word typed with the words in the dictionary and underline words that do

not match with squiggly……………..line. a) Green b) Red c) Blue d) Black

3. ……..key is pressed to delete a misspelled word and the word is retyped? a) Erase b) End c) Backspace d) Space Bar

4. When……..feature in on, Star writer compares each word typed with the words in the dictionary. a) Auto Format b) Auto Correct c) Auto Spell Check d) Auto Done

5. To check spelling after the document is typed? a) Tools����Spelling����Check b) Format�Spelling�Check c) Edit�Spelling�Check d) File�Spelling�Check

6. Used to get spell check window…….. a) F2 b) F5 c) F11 d) F7

7. In the spelling check dialog box which text area displays the misspelled word? a) Not in directory b) Not in Dictionary c) No Spelling d) No word

8. In spelling check dialog box which list displays any alternatives spellings? a) Replace b) Not in dictionary c) With d) Suggestions

9. Which button is clicked to add a new word to the dictionary? a) Enter b) Add c) Change d) Replace

10. The only check box in the Auto correct dialog box is a) Match Case b) Text Only c) Numbers d) Whole words only

11. Which button is clicked to replace all occurrences of the word? a) Replace b) Replace All c) Change d) Change All

12. The button used to skip the spelling change only for the current word is……….. a) Ignore All b) Change c) Ignore Once d) Change All

13. To skip all occurrences of the misspell word in spell check which button is clicked? a) Ignore All b) Change c) Ignore Once d) Change All

14. In the Auto correct dialog box the word to be replaced is typed in the………….text box. a) with b) Change c) Replace with d) Replace

15. If the error and its correction are to be added to the Auto correct list which command is used? a) Tools����Auto Correct b) Format�Auto Correct c) Tools�Spelling�Check d) Edit�Auto Format

16. Which option is very useful for correcting the spelling of the commonly misspelled words? a) Auto Format b) Auto Correct c) Auto Spell Check d) Auto Done

17. In the Auto correct dialog box the replacement word is typed in the………………text box? a) With b) Change c) Replace with d) Replace

18. Which button is clicked this occurrence but stop on the next one? a) Ignore All b) Change c) Ignore Once d) Change All

CHAPTER-3: CORRECTING SPELLING MISTAKES

Page 7: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

7 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

1. To create a table…………..

a) Table����Insert����Table b) Edit�Table�Insert c) Insert�Table�Table d) Tools�Table�Insert

2. Which command is used to display the floating toolbar? a) View����Toolbars����Insert b) View�Insert Table c) Tools�Insert�Table d) Tools�Table�Insert

3. Which key is used to move forward through the cells in a table? a) Shit+Tab b) Tab c) End d) Backspace

4. Which key is used to move backward through the cells in a table? a) Shit+Tab b) Tab c) End d) Backspace

5. The simplest way to add a row is to press……….key in the last row of the table. a) Enter b) Shift c) End d) Tab

6. To insert more than one row in the table is… a) Table�Rows�Insert b) Table����Insert����Rows c) Table�Insert�Columns d) Table�Edit�Insert

7. To insert more than one columns in the table is… a) Table�Rows�Insert b) Table�Insert�Rows c) Table����Insert����Columns d) Table�Edit�Insert

8. By defaults each cell includes a………… a) Rows b) columns c) Table d) Border

9. To delete a the selected rows………… a) Table����Delete����Rows b) Table�Rows�Delete c) Table�Delete�Columns d) Table�Columns�Delete

10. To delete a the selected columns………… a) Table�Delete�Rows b) Table�Rows�Delete c) Table����Delete����Columns d) Table�Columns�Delete

11. Which command is used to select entire table? a) Tools�Delete�Table b) Table�Select�Table c) Table�Table�Select d) Edit����Select All

12. When….key is pressed only the entries are deleted and not in the table. a) Backspace b) Ctrl c) Space bar c) Delete

13. …………is a grid with a specified number of columns and rows in star office writer? a) File b) Cell c) Border d) Table

14. ……..icons that combines two or more cells into a single cell. a) Split Cell b) Merge Cell d) Insert Sect d) Add Cell

15. In Star office writer, Each cell by default includes a… a) border b) Row c) Column d) Row and Column

16. ………used to delete the selected table is a) Tools�Delete�Table b) Table����Delete����Table c) Table�Delete�Rows c) Format�Delete�Table

17. If Table�Table Properties command is used, which can of the following dialog box is opened. a) Table Format b) Table Properties c) Format Table d) Cell Properties

CHAPTER-4: WORKING WITH TABLES

Page 8: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

8 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

18. The command is used to get the Table Format dialog box is? a) Table����Table Properties b) Table�Format c) Table�Format d) Format�Table

19. ……….is used to make all columns even. a) Row�Space Equally b) Column����Space Equally c) Space Equally�Row d) Space Equally�Column

20. ……….is used to make all rows even. a) Row����Space Equally b) Column�Space Equally c) Space Equally�Row d) Space Equally�Column

21. The intersection of row and column is called as…. a) Row b) Column c) Cell d) Table

22. Which button is resize a row or column? a) Ctrl b) Alt c) Enter d) Shift

23. Which of the following key is pressed to resize the column without changing the width of the table in the text documents? a) Alt+Ctrl b) Alt c) Ctrl d) Shift

24. Which command is used to when precise measurements for each column are known or needed?

a) Table����Table Properties b) Table�Format c) Table�Format d) Format�Table

Page 9: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

9 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

1. The default top and bottom margins in star writer….. a) 1.25 b) 1 c) 1.75 d) 1.05

2. The default margin for left and right margins are….. a) 1.5 b) 1.75 c) 1.25 d) 1

3. Which tab in the Page Style dialog box is used to change the margin? a) Page Tab b) Margin Tab c) Ruler Tab d) Format Tab

4. Which command is used to change the margin? a) File�Page b) Edit�Page c) View�Page d) Format����Page

5. ………..is used to see the changes in the page format? a) Format�Page Preview b) File����Page Preview c) Edit�Page Preview d) Insert�Page Preview

6. If the Ruler is not displayed in the screen which option is used to…………. a) Edit�Ruler b) Tools�Ruler c) View����Ruler d) Format�Ruler

7. The Ruler option in Star Office Writer is available under the menu……… a) Edit b) View c) Tools d) Format

8. In which orientation the length of the document will more than the width? a) Portrait b) Landscape c) Wide Page d) paper size

9. In which orientation the width will be more than the length? a) Portrait b) Wide Page c) Landscape d) paper size

10. There are……types of page orientation? a) 3 b) 4 c) 2 d) 1

11. The default size of a page in default orientation is………… a) 8.5X11 b)8X11 c) 11.5X8 d) 8.5X11.5

12. Which tab is selected to change the orientation? a) Header b) Footer c) Page d) Format

13. Which section in the Page style dialog box is selected to change the paper size? a) Page format b) Paper format c) Page size d) Paper size

14. Which tab used to create a header a) Footer b) Header c) Title d) Heading

15. Which tab used to create a footer a) Footer b) Header c) Title d) Heading

16. In a text document, the area at the top of the page is called? a) Title b) Header c) Footer d) Heading

17. In a text document, the area at the bottom of the page is called? a) Footer b) Header c) Title d) Heading

18. Which command is used to insert page numbers on every page? a) Insert����Fields����Page number b) Insert�Number c) Number�Insert d) Format�Number

19. The format of the page numbers can be change the using the…….combo box of the page style dialog box? a) Format b)Page c) Page Number d) Style

20. Margins can be change using…….. a) Page style dialog box b) Ruler c) Both A & B d) None of these

21. The default Page orientation is…………. a) Book b) Portrait c) Handout d) Landscape

CHAPTER-5: PAGE FORMATTING

Page 10: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

10 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

22. Page Preview option is available under the menu………… a) Edit b) File c) View d) Tools

23. …………..command is used to open page style dialog box. a) File�Page b) Edit�Page c) View�Page d) Format����Page

24. Which of the following dialog boxes can be used to set the margins in Star Office Writer? a) Format b) Page Style c) Paragraph d) Table

25. How many methods are used to change the page margin? a) 3 b) 3 c) 4 d) 2

1. The personal computer first appeared in………

a) 1977 b) 1974 c) 1975 d) 1980 2. Visi Calc is invented in the year…………

a) 1975 b) 1979 c) 1972 d) 1977 3. Visi Calc is invented by……….

a) Dan Bricklin b) Bob Frankston c) Dennis Ritchie d) Both A & B 4. Dan Bricklin and Bob Frankston invented?

a) Star Calc b) VisiCalc c) Ms-Excel d) Improve 5. Visi Calc contains……..columns and ………rows.

a) 63, 254 b) 64,254 c) 256,63 d) 256, 32000 6. How many rows are there in star office calc?

a) 32000 b) 30000 c) 254 d) 63 7. Which is the first electronic spreadsheet?

a) Star Calc b) VisiCalc c) Ms-Excel d) Improve 8. Visi Calc was invented for the computer…………

a) IBM b) Apple-II c) Intel d) Pentium 9. The intersection of rows and columns creates………

a) Pointer b) address c) cells d) Sheet 10. There are………….data types used in a spreadsheet?

a) 3 b) 4 c) 2 d) 5 11. Which command is used to create new spreadsheet?

a) File����New����Spreadsheet b) File�New�Worksheet c) File�New�Text document d) File�New�Sheet

12. In which format date should be entered in Star Office Calc? a) DD/MM/YY b) MM/DD/YY c) YY/MM/DD d) DD/YY/MM

13. In which format time should be entered in Star Office Calc? a) HH:MM:SS b) MM:HH:SS c) HH:SS:SS d) MM:SS:HH

14. Which command is used can be used to quit from star office? a) File�Close b) Edit�Close c) File����Exit d) Edit�Exit

15. Which command is used to close the worksheet? a) File�Exit b) Close�Edit c) File����Close d) Exit�Edit

16. Which command is used to open an existing file? a) Edit�Open b) File����Open c) Tools�Open d) Format�Open

17. Which key is used to edit the contents of a cell? a) F1 b) F2 c) F3 d) F4

CHAPTER-6: SPREADSHEET

Page 11: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

11 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

18. Which command is used to format the cells… a) View�Cells b) Edit�Cells c) Format����Cells d) Insert�Cells

19. The cells A4,A5,A6 and B4,B5B6 are referred in a worksheet as a) A4:B6 b) A1:B6 c) A1:B6;B1:B6 d) A4:A6;B4:B6

20. How many cells are available in the worksheet range C1:E2? a) 8 b) 6 c) 5 d) 7

21. Which of the following is text operator? a) : b) $ c) & d) !

22. Which operators return either true or false? a) Arithmetic b) Comparative c) Logical d) Text Operator

23. Which operators return numerical results? a) Arithmetic b) Comparative c) Logical d) Text Operator

24. Which of the following formulae the sum of the numbers in the cell A1 of sheet1 and A2 of Shee2? a) =sum(sheet1.A1+Sheet2.A2) b) =sum(sheet1.A1,Sheet2.A2)

c) =sum(Sheet1.A1;Sheet2.A2) d) =sum(Sheet1.A1:Sheet2.A2) 25. The syntax of formula begins with ……….sign.

a) + b) -- c) = d) * 26. A continuous group of cell is called as…………..

a) Cell pointer b) Relative cell c) Range d) None of these 27. Fill command in Star Office Calc is available under the menu………

a) Edit b) Format c) File d) view 28. In Star Calc, amongst arithmetic operators which one of the following is executed first in the rules of

precedence? a) Addition& Subtraction b) Multiplication & Division c) Exponentiation d) Negative

29. Which term has come to refer specifically to the software packages? a) Data Base b) Table c) Worksheet d) Spreadsheet

30. Which terms to the files that you create with spreadsheet software? a) Data Base b) Table c) Worksheet d) Spreadsheet

31. In which year Lotus 1-2-3 was introduced? a) 1982 b) 1979 c) 1972 d) 1977

32. Lotus 1-2-3 was introduced by………… a) Lotus Corporation b) Borland International c) Sun Micro System d) Micro Soft Corporation

33. Star Calc was introduced by………………. a) Micro Soft Corporation b) IBM c) Lotus Corporation d) Sun Micro System

34. Which company introduced Improve? a) Lotus Corporation b) IBM c) Sun Micro System d) Micro Soft Corporation

35. The spreadsheet developed by Microsoft is,……..? a) Improve b) Quattro pro c)Excel d) Visi Calc

36. The spreadsheet program introduced by Borland International is………… a) Star Calc b) VisiCalc c) Quattro Pro d) Improve

37. The spreadsheet Quattro pro was introduced by……….. a) Lotus Corporation b) Borland International c) Sun Micro System d) Micro Soft Corporation

38. The active cell in which you want to type the data is identified by……… a) Cell Pointer b) insertion point c) row name d) Column name

Page 12: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

12 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

39. Which is a rectangular box covering a cell? a) Column name b) row name c) insertion point d) Cell Pointer

40. To begin with in a worksheet the cell pointer in Star Office Calc? a) 1A b) 2A c) A1 d) A2

41. Which bar is used to display the current cell and its contents? a) Menu bar b) Formula Bar c) Object bar d) Tool bar

42. Which operator represents range? a) : b) ; c) ! d) &

43. Which is following is used for intersection? a) : b) ; c) ! d) &

44. Which operators combines sections of text to the entire text? a) Arithmetic b) Text c) comparative d) reference

45. Which operator combines areas? a) Arithmetic b) Text c) comparative d) reference

46. Which symbol is used to absolute cell addressing? a) & b) $ c) # d) @

47. The command is used to change the column width………. a) Edit�Column�Width b) Format�Width�Colum c) Format����Column����Width d) Format�Row�Height

48. The command is used to change the row height? a) Format����Row����Height b) Format �Column�Width c) Edit �Row �Height d) Format �Height �Set

49. …………automatically generates a data series based on a defined pattern? a) Auto Copy b) Auto Fill c) Fill Auto d) Fill Copy

50. ……………. Command is used to generate a series in Star Office Calc a) Fill b)Page Style c) Print Range d) Page Format

51. Which command is used to generate a series of data in the selected cells?

a) Edit����Fill����Series b) File�Fill�Series c) Fill�Series�File d) Format�Fill�Series

52. How many types of cell references are there in star office calc? a) 2 b) 3 c) 4 d)5

53. ………addressing is the default type of cell addressing used by star calc?

a) Absolute cell b) primary cell c) Relative cell d) compare cell 54. Which cell addressing do not change when copied?

a) Absolute b) relative c)range d) protected 55. In Star Office Calc, a spreadsheet contains………..sheets.

a) One b) Two c) Three d) Multiple 56. Which symbol is used for 3D formula?

a) $ b) ; c) , d) # 57. Which of the following data can be typed into a spreadsheet cell?

a) Numbers b) Text c) Formulae d) All of these 58. The option under the File menu used to quit the star office is

a) Close b) Exit c) End d) Quit 59. ………are predefined formula that are available in star office calc?

a) Cell pointer b)formula bar c) functions d)range

Page 13: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

13 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

60. Which command is used to select a function? a) Edit� Function b) Tools �Function c) File �Function d) Insert ����Function

61. Which shortcut icon on the formula bar can be used to select and insert functions? a) Tools wizard b) Function Wizard c) Function Autopilot d) Function Insert

62. Which function is used to find the square root of a number? a) SQR( ) b) SQRT( ) c) SQT d) SQUARE( )

63. Which function calculates the sum of a given set of numbers? a) SUM b) SQRT( ) c) ADD d) TOTAL

64. Which function is mostly commonly used? a) SQRT ( ) b) SUM( ) c) COS d) TAN

65. Which company introduced Improve? a) Microsoft b) Lotus corporation c) sun micro systems d) Borland international

66. Which facility helps to format the worksheet with different predefined styles and colors? a) Auto style sheet b) Auto format sheet c) Auto edit sheet d) Auto colour sheet

67. Which command is used to get the Autoformat sheet facility? a) Edit�Auto format b) Format����Auto format c) Tools�Auto format d) Format�Auto

68. In Star calc, which menu contains AutoFormat? a) File b)Edit c) Format d) Style

69. When you click the Insert Cell icon, a floating tool bar with…………..icons appear on the screen? a) 2 b) 4 c) 3 d) 5

70. Which icon is clicked to insert an empty cell in a column and moves the existing cell down? a) Insert Cells Down b) Insert Cells Right c) Insert Rows d) Insert Columns

71. Which icon is used to shift the content of a cell to the right and to create an empty cell? a) Insert Cells Down b) Insert Cells Right c) Insert Rows d) Insert Columns

72. Which icon is used to insert empty row in a spreadsheet? a) Insert Cells Down b) Insert Cells Right c) Insert Rows d) Insert Columns

73. Which icon is used to insert empty column in a spreadsheet? a) Insert Cells Down b) Insert Cells Right c) Insert Rows d) Insert Columns

74. Which option is used to delete the selected cells? a) Delete Rows b) Delete Cells c) Delete Columns d) Delete All

75. If you want to delete an entire row or column which command should be selected? a) Edit����Delete Cells b) Format�Delete Cells c) File�Delete Cells d) Tools�Delete Cells

76. To delete all contents from the selected cell range, click on the check box? a) Delete One b) Delete Entire Cells c) Delete Rows d) Delete All

77. When you click the Insert cell option, which icon does not appear on the floating tool bar? a) Insert Cells Up b) Insert Cells Left c) Insert Rows d) Both A & B

78. Which operator is meant for inequality? a) <= b) >= c) < > d) !=

79. The Operator < > means is used to check…….. a) equal b) greater c) Inequality d) Less than

80. Which command is used to insert picture in the worksheet? a) Insert����Picture����From File b) Edit�Picture�From File c) Insert�From file�Picture d) from file�Picture�Insert

81. Which command is used to insert the special characters in a worksheet? a) Insert�Symbols b) Insert����Special characters c) Insert�Characters d) Characters�Insert

Page 14: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

14 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

82. Which icon is used to insert the special characters in a worksheet? a) Insert Symbols b) Insert Special characters c) Insert Characters d) Characters Insert

83. To Draw an ellipse in the worksheet clicking the…….icon. a) Draw Ellipse b) Show draw functions c) Draw functions d) Draw Rectangle

84. Which icon is used for presenting the data in the worksheet for performing of charts of different kinds? a) Insert Character b) Insert Symbols c) Insert Picture d) Insert Chart

85. Which icon is used for inserting a formula in the worksheet for performing calculations? a) Insert Formula b) Insert Characters c) Insert Picture d) Insert Symbols

86. Which command is used to insert chart in a worksheet? a) Format�chart b) Edit�Chart c) File�Chart d) Insert����Chart

87. Which icon is used to insert objects from other applications into a worksheet? a) Insert OLE Object b) insert Applet c) Insert Chart d) Insert Other Objects

88. Which icon is used to insert movie and sound into a worksheet? a) Insert Movie and Sound b) Insert Formula c) Insert Chart d) Insert Floating Frame

89. Which icon provides to generate a rolling screen within a worksheet? a) Insert Applet b) Insert Formula c) Insert Chart d) Insert Floating Frame

90. Which is used to create and quickly perform “What if analysis of inter related columnar data in work spaces? a) Word processor b) Data Base c) Spreadsheet d) Table

91. Which of the following is not a spreadsheet? a) Lotus 1-2-3 b) MS-Word c) Ms-Excel d) Star Calc

92. The process of adding, deleting, modifying the data present in a worksheet is known as……….. a) Editing b) Sorting c) Merging d) Formatting

93. Clicking on Number Format: Currency icon will display the contents of the selected cells with a…..…sign in front and with two decimal digits. a) $ b)# c) @ d) &

94. Which is used to calculate and analyze set of numbers? a) Formula b) Charts c) Spreadsheet d) Function

95. Which is spreadsheet program? a) Improve b) Flash c) Sat Office Base d) Lotus Amipro

96. The reference operator in Star Office Calc is? a) ! b) % c) # d) .

97. The number of rows in Visi Calc? a) 63 b) 256 c) 254 d) 255

98. The Number of columns in Visi Calc? a) 32000 b) 63 c) 64 d) 254

99. Which command is used to print the worksheet with the grids? a) File�Page b) Print�Grid c) Format����Page d) File�Sheet

100. Which bars have shortcut icons for frequently done tasks in the spreadsheet? a) Menu bar b) Formula bar c) Function bar & Object bar d) Main Tool bar

101. To do the calculations for different worksheets in a particular sheet we use……… a) 2D formula b) Function c) 3D formula d) Selection

102. Graphic representations of numbers are known as ………… a) Charts b) Graphs c) Bar diagrams d) Cells

Page 15: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

15 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

103. Which option File menu can be used to preview a worksheet before printing? a) Page setup b) print c) Page Preview d) Page View

104. Which command is used to preview a worksheet before printing? a) File����Page Preview b) Format�Page Preview c) Edit�Page Preview d) View�Page Preview

105. Which command is used to save the worksheet? a) Edit�Save b) Save�File c) File����save d) Format�Save

106. Which shortcut key is used to save the worksheet? a) Ctrl+B b) Ctrl+S c) Ctrl+A d) Ctrl+X

107. Which command is used to print the worksheet? a) Edit�Print b) File����Print c) Print�File d) Format�File

108. Which command is used to select the range to be print? a) Edit�Print Range�Remove b) Format����Print Range����Edit c) Edit�Remove�Print Range d) Format�Remove�Print Range

109. Which command is used to `remove selected the print range? a) Edit�Print Range�Remove b) Format����Print Range����Remove c) Edit�Remove�Print Range d) Format�Remove�Print Range

110. The cell K4 becomes absolute when you enter? a) K$4$ b) $K$4 c) $K4$ d) $K4

111. Which of the following is an exponentiation operator in Star Office Calc? a) * b) + c) ^ d) < >

112. Which of the following is an reference operator? a) < b) : c) % d) &

113. 05/25/99+9=……………..?(MM/DD/YY )

a) 05/31/99 b) 06/03/99 c) 06/04/99 d) 05/29/99

Page 16: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

16 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

1. The term of data come s from word…………….. a) Datu b) Datum c) Datam d) Datamus

2. The …………..is a fact abut people, places or some entities? a) Data base b) Data c) information d) DBMS

3. In computers, data is simply the value assigned to a……….. a) Constant b) Variable c) object d) fact

4. Users can define their own more sophisticated data types which are known as……………data types? a) primitive b) user defined c) built in d) fundamental

5. ……….is a set of processed data that convey the relationship between the data considered. a) Data b) Data Base c) Datum d) Information

6. Which means to do some operations or computations on the data of different variables to relate them? a) Data base b) Data processing c) information d) DBMS

7. Which is a group related data conveying some meaning? a) Data processing b) Data base c) information d) information

8. Which is a repository of collections of related data or facts? a) Data b) Data Base c) Datum d) Information

9. Which of the following arranges data in a specific structure? a) Table b) Data c) information d) Data Base

10. Data in a……….is most commonly viewed in one or two dimensional tables, each considered of columns and rows? a) Data b) Data Base c) Datum d) Information

11. The entire collection of related data in one table is referred to as a………… a) Field b) Record c) file d) Data base

12. Which groups each piece or item of data among the records into specific categories or types of data? a) Data b) Data Base c) Datum d) Information

13. Each row in a table represents………… a) Field b) Record c) Database d) data

14. Each table column represents ………….. a) File b) Record c) Database d) Field

15. ………..is a process to select a desired specific data from a data base? a) Sorting b) Searching c) Merging d) Filtering

16. ………..is a process to arranging the data in a table in some order? a) Merging b) Filtering c) Searching d) Sorting

17. ..……is a process of joining data from two or more tables of the same or different database a) Joining b)Viewing c) Merging d)Filtering

18. Which is a feature for displaying and browsing a selected list or subset of records from a table? a) Joining b)Viewing c) Merging d)Filtering

19. ………..is a process of performing corrections on the existing data, adding new data or deleting the existing data and so on? a) Editing b) Sorting c) Filtering d) Merging

20. Which is a printed information based on query that gathers criteria-matching data? a) Application b) File c) Report d) Query

CHATER-7: DATABASE

Page 17: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

17 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

21. The data bases are classified into………….categories? a) 3 b) 2 c) 4 d) 5

22. There are……………types of manipulation of data base? a) 5 b) 6 c) 7 d) 8

23. Spreadsheet is an example of…………. a) Flat file b) Relational c) Hierarchical d) Object oriented

24. A data base file that consists of single data table is a………..…data base. a) Relational b) Hierarchical c) Object oriented d) Flat file

25. Which data base can be quite useful for certain single user or small group situations? a) Flat file b) Relational c) Hierarchical d) Object oriented

26. Which data base is very powerful? a) Relational b) Hierarchical c) Object oriented d) Flat file

27. Which data base is made up of a set of related tables? a) Flat file b) Relational c) Hierarchical d) Object oriented

28. Which data base structure is the most prevalent data base in today’s business organizations? a) Relational b) Hierarchical c) Object oriented d) Flat file

29. The common filed or fields are called………….. a) File b) Table c) Record d) Keys

30. ………is a key that uniquely identifies a record in a database table a) Primary key b) Field c) Record d) Secondary key

31. The data base structure primarily used on Mainframe computers is…………..data base. a) Relational b) Hierarchical c) Object oriented d) Flat file

32. In which data base the relationship between the record types is said to be a parent-child relationship? a) Flat file b) Relational c) Hierarchical d) Object oriented

33. Which data base is a newer structure that has been generating a great deal of interest in recent years? a) Relational b) Hierarchical c) Object oriented d) Flat file

34. DBMS stands for……………. a) Data Basic Management System b) Data Base Making Service c) Data Base Management System d) Data Base Management Service

35. There are………….types of data processing? a) 3 b) 2 c) 4 d) 5

36. Which application is used for data processing? a) Star office writer b) Star office Calc c) Star office Base d) Star office

37. Which of the following is not a data type? a) Text b) Information c) Boolean d) Number

38. ……..is not a step in data processing. a) Collection b) Verification c) Validation d) Computation

39. Data processing involves the following? a) Collection b) Verification c) Validation d) All of these

40. Which of the following is not a step in data processing? a) Filtering b)Verification c)Validation d) Report generation

41. The data management tasks in a DBMS are classified into………….categories. a) 3 b) 2 c) 4 d) 5

42. Which provides the means for multiple users to access and share data in the same data base by way networked computer systems? a) Data base b) DBMS c) information d) None of these

Page 18: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

18 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

43. Which command is used to create new data base? a) File�Database�New b) ) ) ) File����New����Database c) New�File�Database d) New�Database�File

44. Which command is used create new table in the data base? a)Table�Insert�Table b)Insert����Table Design c)Table�Insert d) Insert�Table

45. Which command is used to insert a table in data base? a)Table�Insert�Table b)Insert����Table Design c)Table�Insert d) Insert�Table

46. The shortcut key is used to save a table in the data base? a) Ctrl+B b) Ctrl+S c) Ctrl+A d) Ctrl+X

47. There are …………different fields types in star office. a) 15 b) 10 c) 21 d) 20

48. An object is defined by its…………. a) Attributes, procedures b) Characteristics, attributes c) Characteristics, attributes, procedure d) Method, procedures

49. ……….data types accepts values up to a few thousands. a) Float b) Integer c) Small int d) binary

50. In the case of single precision decimal values are accurate up to a length of ……places a) 7 b) 14 c) 6 d) 8

51. In the case of double precision decimal values are accurate up to a length of…….places. a) 7 b) 14 c) 6 d) 8

52. Press the……….key to move the next field. a) Alt b) Ctrl c) Tab d) Shift

53. Which option is used to specify the maximum characters that can be entered in that field? a) Width b) Field Length c) Length d) Field Width

54. Which option is used to specify if the user should always enter a value for that field? a) Default value b) Format c) Entry Required d) Length

55. Which option is used to specify a default value to be assigned to that field? a) Default value b) Format c) Entry Required d) Length

56. Which option allows you to specify the number format and alignment of the text or number within the column? a) Alignment b) Format Example c) Default Value d) Length

57. ………….option specifies the number of decimal places permitted in that field? a) Decimal Places b) Default Value c) Format Example d) Default Value

58. Which symbol is used to view and modify the table which is already designed and stored? a) * symbol b) + ) + ) + ) + symbol c) - symbol d) / symbol

59. Which is small triangle on the leftmost column of the table? a) File pointer b)Filed Pointer c)Record Pointer d) Data Pointer

60. Which option is used to change the height of the row? a) Row Height b) Record Height c)Column Height d) Column width

61. Which option is used to delete the selected record? a) Delete Record b) Record Delete c) Remove Record d) Delete Rows

62. Which command is used to format the data in the table? a) Table Insert b)))) Table Format c) Table Properties d) Table Design

63. Which option is used to modify the design of an existing table? a) ) ) ) Edit b) View c) Format d) Table Design

Page 19: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

19 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

64. When you click…………icons, the records in the table are displayed in the ascending order of the specified field? a) Sort descending b) Sort ascending c) Sort d) Sort records

65. When you click…………icons, the records in the table are displayed in the descending order of the specified field? a) Sort descending b) Sort ascending c) Sort d) Sort records

66. Which icon is used to multiple sorts? a) Sort descending b) Sort ascending c) Sort d) Sort records

67. Which icon is used to display the records in the original order? a) Remove filter/sort b) Remove sort/filter c) Delete filter/sort d) Delete sort/filter

68. SQL stands for a) Standard Query Language b) System Query Language c) Structure Query Language d) System Query Language

69. The language supported by DBMS hat similar to a programming language is………… a) C++ b) SQL c) Java d) C

70. ……………are special views of the data in the table? a) Reports b) Forms c) Filters d) Queries

71. The result from a……………is always stored in separately and can be viewed at any time? a) Filters b) Reports c) Queries d) Forms

72. Queries are……..statements. a) Predefined b) Structural c) User-Defined d) User-Constructed

73. ……….are user constructed statements that set conditions for selecting and manipulating data? a) Reports b) Forms c) Filters d) Queries

74. The computers that primarily use the hierarchical data base are ………… a) Super b) Mainframe c) Personal d) Mini

75. How many steps are involved in Report wizard? a) 6 b) 7 c) 8 d) 9

76. …..way is a way of limiting the information that appears on screen? a) Searching b) Filtering c) Merging d) Report

77. Which of the following is not field type in star office base? a) Time b) Date c) Real d) String

78. A………….is a type of query. a) Form b) Sort c) Filter d) Query

79. How many filters are available are there in Star office Base? a) 3 b) 2 c) 4 d) 1

80. Filter used with condition is…… a) Auto filter b) Standard filter c) Default Filter d) Both B & C

81. Which filter is used to display only the records, which match the value of the current field? a) Auto filter b) Standard filter c) Default Filter d) Both B & C

82. Which is default filter? a) Form b) Auto filter c) Query d) Standard filter

83. Which icon is used to remove the filter? a) Remove filter/sort b) Remove sort/filter c) Delete filter/sort d) Delete sort/filter

84. Which is a screen that displays the fields of a record in a well spaced-out manner a) Form b) Query c) Report d) Filter

Page 20: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

20 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

85. In Star Office Base, which is printed information that is assembled by gathering data based on user supplied criteria

a) Reports b) Filter c) Form d) Query 86. How many steps are involved in Query Wizard?

a) 4 b) 6 c) 8 d) 9 87. ……….is used to display the records in the original order

a) Remove sort/ filter b) Delete sort/ filter c) Remove filter/ sort d) Delete filter/sort 88. Which amongst the following consists of usable sets of data?

a) Form b) Field c) Information d) Record 89. Example for flat file data base is………..

a) Word processor b) Animation c) Presentation d) Spreadsheet 90. ………..are user defined screens that are used to make it easier to enter, view and edit the data in a table

or query? a) Reports b) Filter c) Forms d) Query

91. In Star Base, which on of the following is not a process in editing the data base? a) Calculating result b) Adding new record c) Deleting existing data d) Changing format of the data base

92. Which check box should be selected if you want insert a another form within a form? a) Subform Add b) Add Subform c) Set up a subform d) Add form

93. To insert the Spread sheet calc cell in Star Office Writer, select a) Edit � Paste b) Edit ����Paste Special c) Tools �Paste Special d) Format�Paste

94. To insert a calc cell range into a text document which option should be selected from the paste special dialog box?

a) Create link b) Html link c) DDE link d) link 95. To send text outline into presentation , select……………

a) File ����Send ����Outline to Presentation b) File � Outline to Presentation c) File � Presentation d) File �Send � Presentation

96. There are……types of reports in Star office base. a) 3 b) 4 c) 1 d) 2

97. …………steps are there in Report Wizard Window a) 6 b) 7 c) 8 d) 9

98. To send text outline with paragraph into Presentation, select…………. a)))) File����Send����Auto Abstract Presentation Command b) Edit�Send�Auto Abstract Presentation Command c) File�Send� Presentation Command d) File�Send�Presentation

99. ………..is a way of limiting the information that appears on screen a) Searching b) Filtering c)Merging d) Report

100. ………… language is used to query the database a) C++ b) SQL c) HTML d)DBMS

101. Which data bases are mainly used in mainframe computers? a) Flat file b) Relational c) Hierarchical d) Object Oriented

102. Which of the following is not a valid field type in star office? a) Memo b) Image c) Date d) String

103. Which data base look like tree structure? a) Flat file b)Relational c) Hierarchical d) Object Oriented

104. Which data base is used in today business organizations? a) Flat file b) Relational c) Hierarchical d) Object Oriented

Page 21: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

21 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

105. Which of the following is user constructed statements in Star Office Base? a) Reports b) Filter c) Forms d) Query

106. Which involves data collection, verification, and validation and report generation? a) Searching b) Sorting c) Data processing d) Filtering

107. Which of the following limits the information on the screen of data base? a) Searching b) Filtering c)Merging d) Report

108. Which is used to assemble information from data? a) Data b) DBMS c) HTTP d) Presentation

109. Which is used to arrange the records in alphabetical or numerical order? a) Searching b) Filtering c) Sorting d) Report

110. Which of the following is not a step in data processing? a) Collection b) Verification c) Validation d) Sorting

111. Which of the following is not a valid field type in Star Office Base? a) Project b) Image c) Time d) Memo

112. What are the two types of reports? a) Default, Static b) Auto, Query c) Auto, Standard d) Auto, Static

113. What are the types of filters? a) Default, Static b) Auto, Query c) Auto, Standard d) Auto, Static

114. Which is a can be associated with a single table or with multiple table? a) Form b) Filter c) Query d) Report

115. Which data base is not possible for process more extensive information from multiple data tables? a) Flat file b) Relational c) Hierarchical d) Object Oriented

116. Which is can not be saving? a) Form b) Filter c) Query d) Report

117. Which is saved and you can execute them whenever you want? a) Form b) Filter c) Query d) Report

118. How many queries create for a given table? a) One b) Two c) Three d) Multiple

Page 22: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

22 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

1. Which of the following is a computer based presentation technique? a) Multimedia b) Spreadsheet c) Data Processing d) Data Base

2. Which of the following is a computer based presentation technique that incorporates text, sound, animations and video elements? a)Virtual reality b) Multimedia c) Animations d) Modeling

3. Multimedia incorporates features like……….. a) Text b) Sound c) Video d) All of these

4. Which is widely used to add special effects to movies? a) Data Base b) Spreadsheet c) Data Processing d) Multimedia

5. MMS……………… a) Multimedia Messaging Songs b) Multimedia Mass Storage c) Multimedia Messaging System d) Multi Media System

6. ……… is an application that allows you to send and receive messages over cell phones a) MMS b) SMS c) SMM d) MSM

7. Which technique is used to impart training to pilots, without having to go for a real fight? a) Flight services b) Flight Stimulator c) Flight system d) Flight Structure

8. The technique that provides an environment experienced by users as similar to reality is….. a) Virtual reality b) Vector graphics c) Animations d) Modeling

9. E-learning packages are available in how many ways? a) 3 b) 4 c) 2 d) 5

10. Expansion of CBT………. a) Computer Based Tutorials b) Common Based Tutorials c) Company Based Tutorials d) Compact Based Tutorials

11. WBT stands for ……… a) Web Based Tutorials b) World Based Training

c) Web Based Training d) Window Based Training 12. Which learning packages are used to train and educate people world over?

a) CBT/WBT b) SMS/MMS c) MMS/WBT d) SMS/CBT 13. Which method used self-paced learning aids that are either available on CD-ROMs or on the Internet?

a) Computer based tutorials b) e-learning c) Web based learning d) A & C 14. How many image formats are most common by far?

a) 3 b) 4 c) 2 d) 5 15. ………….and………….image format are most common by far?

a) GIF/JPG b) AVI/SND c) MP3/MPEG d) GIF/Nx View 16. ……..are typical examples for static images?

a) Shockwave files b) MPEG files c) AVI files d) Photographs 17. GIF stands for……

a) Graphic Interchange File b) Graphic Interchange format c) Graphic Information File d) Graphic Information Format

18. Expand JPEG a) Joint Photo Experts Group b) Joint Photographic Experts Group

c) Joint Processor Experts Group d) Joint Photographic Expression Group 19. Which files create the perfect reproduction of the original?

a) JPG b) TIF c) MP3 d) GIF

CHAPTER-8: MULTIMEDIA

Page 23: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

23 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

20. GIF is limited to an…………bit palette. a) 32 b) 16 c) 4 d) 8

21. ………..is best suited for storing simple graphic images with relatively few colors? a) GIF b) JPG c) MPEG d) Nx View

22. Which format is still used extensively on the internet and Multimedia applications? a) JPG b) TIF c) MP3 d) GIF

23. Which image files are lossy format? a) GIF b) JPEG c) MPEG d) Nx View

24. Nearly all digital cameras have the option to save images in………….. a) JPEG b) TIF c) MP3 d) GIF

25. Which format supports full color and products relatively small file sizes? a) GIF b) JPEG c) MPEG d) Nx View

26. There are…………..categories of image compression. a) 3 b) 1 c) 4 d) 2

27. ……help in rendering the image effectively on the screen. a) Lossy format b) Lossless format c) Vector Graphics d) None of these

28. Many vendors provide special hardware called…….….to improves the efficiency in the display of images. a) Vector Graphics Card b) Lossless format c) Lossy format d) None of these

29. The sound that we hear are……………….wave patterns? a) echo b) pitch c) Analog d) Digital

30. How many attributes control the characteristics of sound? a) 3 b) 1 c) 4 d) 2

31. Which attributes control the characteristics of sound? a) Amplitude, frequency b) amplitude, wavelength c) wavelength, frequency d) volume, time

32. The distance between the crests of the wave is known as…………. a) Crest b) echo c) sound d) Pitch

33. The conversion of analog sound waves into digital format is called as…….. a) Sound forge b) Sound Editing c) Sampling d) Sound Card

34. Special effects such as echo, fade in and fade out effects, by using sound editing program such as……….. a) Sound forge b) Sound Editing c) Sampling d) Sound Card

35. …………..is a sound editing program a) Maya b) Sound Forge c) Flash d) Shockwave

36. Which is used to illustrate or demonstrate an idea or a concept? a)Virtual reality b) Multimedia c) Animations d) Modeling

37. Animations are based on…………….and ………………… a) Photograph b) Drawings c) Both A&B d) None of these

38. There are…………….categories of animations. a) 2 b) 1 c) 4 d) 3

39. Based on how 2-D animations are created, that they can be broadly classified into…………….categories. a) 3 b) 1 c) 4 d) 2

40. Which is 2-D animation? a) Cell-based animation b) Object based animation c) Both A&B d) object picture

41. Which animation consist of multiple drawings, each one a little different from the others? a) Object based animation b) Cell-based animation c) Animation based d) object picture

Page 24: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

24 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

42. Which animation each drawings different from the others? a) Cell-based animation b) Object based animation c) Object picture d) Animation based

43. Which animations are created by moving an object across a screen? a) Object based animation b) Cell-based animation c) Animation based d) object picture

44. Which animations are referred to as slide or path? a) Cell-based animation b) Object based animation c) Object picture d) Animation based

45. Object based animations are referred to as……………animations. a) Slide b) Path c) Both A&B d) Picture Based

46. Which type of animations are usually seen in computer games? a) Cell-based animation b) Object based animation c) Object picture d) Animation based

47. Creating 3-D animations is a……………step process? a) 3 b) 1 c) 4 d) 2

48. Which of the following is not a step in the process of creating a 3-D animation? a) Modeling b) Rendering c) Filtering d) animating

49. Which of the following is step to create 3-D animation? a) Modeling b) animating c) Rendering d) All of these

50. Once the animation is created in how many ways you can further enhance it? a) 2 b) 3 c) 4 d) 1

51. Once the animation is created, you can further enhance it by adding special effects such as……and……… a) Morphing, Warping b) Modeling, Rendering c) Warping, Animating d) Rendering, Animating

52. Which is a technique by which you can blend two or more images to form a new image? a) Warping b) Morphing c) Animating d) Rendering

53. …………is a technique of distorting a single image to represent something else? a) Morphing b) Warping c) Modeling d) Rendering

54. Which files tend to be heavy? a) Sound b) Animation c) Picture d) Video

55. Reducing the color depth of less than ……..colors results in the image looking murky. a) 250 b) 150 c) 256 d) 255

56. Reducing the frame count to less than ……….. frames per second causes the video to look jerky a) 20 b) 16 c) 15 d) 10

57. ……….is a technique by which a recurring set of information is identified and replaced by a single piece of information a) Animating b) Deleting c) Compression d) Warping

58. You can reduce the size of videos by………….……them. a) Compression b) Animating c) Rendering d) Warping

59. There are………….types of video compressions. a) 1 b) 3 c) 4 d) 2

60. Which compression retains the exact image throughout the compression? a) Lossy format b) Lossless format c) Morphing d) Warping

61. Which compression provides a comparatively higher ratio of compression but results in some loss of quality? a) Morphing b) Warping c) Lossless format d) Lossy format

62. Expand MIDI. a) Mutual Instruction Digital Interface b) Musical Instrument Digital Interface c) Metal Instrument Digital Interface d) Make Interface Digital Instruction

Page 25: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

25 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

63. Which format is used for transferring music information between music devices like synthesizes and sound cards in computers? a) MIDI b) AIFF c) Quick Time d) AVI

64. Midi format was developed the year…………. a) 1985 b) 1982 c) 1993 d) 1981

65. Which format can not contain sounds but contain only digital notes? a) SND b) AIFF c) MIDI d) AU

66. A………. file that plays for approximately 5 minutes may be only 25KB. a) MIDI b) AIFF c) Quick Time d) AVI

67. A MIDI file that plays for approximately 5 minutes may be only…………KB. a) 20 b) 24 c) 25 d) 22

68. Which format is a flexible format that can be used for a wide range of music applications? a) AVI b) MIDI c) Wave d) AIFF

69. The extension of MIDI format is…….. a) .mid (or) .midi b) .mdi (or) .mi c) .wva d) wave

70. In which year the Real audio/Real video format was developed? a) 1985 b) 1993 c) 1996 d) 1995

71. The Real Audio/Real video format was developed by……… a) Real Networks b) IBM c) Apple d) Lotus

72. Which format is more popular for transfer of data over the Internet? a) Wave b) Real Audio/ Real Video c) MIDI d) SND

73. Which format allows you to stream files even over Internet connections with low bandwidths? a) SND b) Windows Media player c) Wave d) Real Audio/ Real Video

74. Real Audio/Real Video format files have the extension……… a) .rm (or) .ram b) .rmu c) .au d) .avi

75. Files in the Au format have the extension…………. a) .avi b) .av c) .au d) .aui

76. AIFF format was developed by…….. a) IBM b) Apple c) Microsoft d) Real Networks

77. Give the expansion of AIFF a)Audio Information File Format b) Audio Interface file Format c)Audio Interchange File Format d) Audio Interleave File Fornat

78. Files in the AIFF format have the extension of…………. a) .aif (or) .aiff b) .aifu c) .auif d) .avif

79. The sound of SND format was developed by……….. a) IBM b) Apple c) Microsoft d) Real Networks

80. Which formats are developed by Apple? a) MIDI/AVI b) AU/SND c) SND/AIFF d) MIDI/SND

81. Files in the SND format have the extension of……….. a) .snd b) .sdn c) .dns d) .sd

82. Which format was developed by……….and…………… a) Wave b) Real Audio/ Real Video c) MIDI d) SND

83. The extension of Waves……….. a) .wa b) .wav c) .wva d) wave

84. The expansion of MPEG a) Moving Processor Export Group b) Moving Pictures Experts Group c) Moving Process Experts Group d) Moving Photographic Expression Group

85. Which format was developed for video files? a) MP3 b) MPEG c) JPEG d) GIF

Page 26: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

26 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

86. Which format was developed for audio files? a) MP3 b) MPEG c) JPEG d) GIF

87. Which formats offer good compression and high quality? a) MP3/MPEG b) Nx Viex c) JPEG d) GIF

88. Sound files stored in the MP3 format have the extension……. a) .mp3 (or) .mpga b) .mpeg (or) .mpg c) .wva d) .wav

89. Video files stored in MPEG format have the extension……. a) .mp3 (or) .mpga b) .mpg (or) .mpeg c) .ram d) .au

90. The expansion of AVI…………. a) Audio Video Interleave b) Audio Visual Interleave c) Audio Video Interface d) Audio Video Interchange

91. AVI format was developed in the year…… a) 1995 b) 1992 c) 1985 d) 1991

92. AVI format was developed by a) IBM b) Apple c) Microsoft d) Real Networks

93. Video files stored in the AVI format have the extension of……….. a) .wav b) .avi c) .au d) .snd

94. The Windows Media format was developed by………… a) Real Networks b) IBM c) Apple d) Microsoft

95. The extension of Windows Media format files is……….. a) .mov b) .wmv c) .mmv d) .avi

96. The Quick Time format was developed by…………primarily to stored videos. a) Real Networks b) IBM c) Apple d) Microsoft

97. Files in the Quick Time format have the extension of……… a) .qtm b) .wmv c) .mov d) .qkm

98. The shockwave format was developed by………. a) Sun Macro Media b) Macromedia c) Microsoft d) Real Networks

99. The Shockwave format is used to store multimedia components created using? a) Flash b) Media player c) Internet Explorer d) Netscape Navigator

100. Which format requires an extra component to play? a) Wave b) Shockwave c) Windows Media d) AVI

101. The files in the shockwave format is……… a) .sfw b) .saf c) .svf d) .swf

102. You can add inline sound to a web page by using the……….and……….tags. a) bgsound/applet b) bgsound / img c) snd / bgsound d) img/snd

103. Helper application is also called……. a) Plug in b) Multimedia c) video d)Audio

104. ………….tag is not used to launch helper applications. a) <embed> b) <name > c) < applet> d) < object >

105. Which tags are used to launch helper applications? a) < embed >,<applet> b) < applet >,<Object> c) < embed >,<object> d)< embed>,< applet >,<Object>

106. …………is used to add in line sound a) < bgsound > b) < bgobject > c) < embed > d) < applet >

107. How many tags are used to launch helper applications? a) 1 b) 2 c) 3 d) 4

Page 27: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

27 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

108. Which of the following is the commercial multimedia content development software? a) Flashing b) Dream viewer c) Maya d) All of these

109. Which of the following is not a step in the process of creating a 3-D animation. a) Modeling b) Rendering c) Morphing d) animating

110. Which of the following formats creates a perfect reproduction of images? a) GIF b) JPG c) MPEG d) Nx View

111. Multimedia applications that allow users to actively participate instead of just sitting by as passive recipients of information are called? a) Interactive System b) Computer Based Tutorial c) Multimedia System d) Web Based Tutorials

112. Frequency is also called as…………. a) Crest b) echo c) sound d) Pitch

Page 28: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

28 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

1. Which are most powerful and effective ones to communicate to an audience? a) Data base b) Presentations c) Text d) Tables

2. Which star office application allows you to create attractive and professional-looking presentation? a) Star office impress b) Star office draw c) Star office calc d) Star office base

3. Which command is used to create a new Impress presentation from within any Star Office application? a) File�Presentation�New b) File����New����Presentation c) File�New Presentation d) File�Presentation

4. The first page of the presentation wizard displays………options. a) 4 b) 3 c) 5 d) 2

5. Which page of the presentation Wizard allows you to select a background for all the slides in the presentation? a) First b) Second c) Third d) Fourth

6. Which page of the presentation Wizard allows you to create an empty presentation? a) First b) Second c) Third d) Fourth

7. Which page of the presentation Wizard allows you to specify the transition effects to be used in the presentation? a) First b) Second c) Third d) Fourth

8. In the third page of Presentation wizard allows at the top of the page allows you to choose the transition effect and speed in the slides? a) Select a slide Design b) Select a slide Transition c) Select an output medium d) select a Background

9. Which of option allows you to manually control the transition of slides using options such as mouse clicks?

a) Default b) Manual c) Optional d) Automatic

10. Which option allows you to specify the duration for each slide and will automatically flip through the slides at the specified speed? a) Default b) Manual c) Optional d) Automatic

11. Which spin box allows you to specify the duration for the slides? a) Duration of slide b) Duration of pause c) Duration of page d) Duration of display

12. Which spin box allows you to specify the duration for which the presentation will before it starts again? a) Duration of slide b) Duration of pause c) Duration of page d) Duration of display

13. Which check box display the message “created with star office” during the pause between each presentation?

a) Show message b) Show logo c) Show icons d) Show preview 14. Which views allows to create and edit the slides?

a) Normal view b) Slide sorter view c) Notes View d) Handout views 15. Which key combination is used to create a new presentation using a template?

a) Ctrl+Alt+N b) Shift+Alt+N c) Shift+Tab+N d) Shit+Ctrl+N 16. Which command is used to create a new presentation using a template?

a) File����New����Templates and Documents b) Edit�New�Templates c) File�New�Templates d) File�Documents

17. Which bar at the bottom of the screen displays status information such as the number of slides? a) Menu bar b) Tool bar c) Status bar d) Information bar

CHAPTER-9: PRESENTATION

Page 29: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

29 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

18. Which pane displays the slides in the presentation? a) Left b) Top c) Right d) Middle

19. Star Office Impress presentation window contains…………..panes? a) 4 b) 3 c) 5 d) 2

20. Which pane allows you to view the slide in the presentation? a) Left b) Right c) Middle d) Top

21. The middles pane in the presentation windows displays…………….tabs at the top. a) 1 b) 4 c) 3 d) 5

22. Which view allows you to create and edit the slides? a) Outline view b) Normal view c) Notes View d) Handouts view

23. Which view allows you to reorder slides, edit slide titles and heading? a) Normal view b) Notes View c) Handouts view d)))) Outline view

24. Which view allows you to add notes to the slides view any existing notes for the slide? a) Notes View b) Outline view c) Handouts view d) Normal view

25. Which view allows you to scale the slides so that several slides can fit into a page? a) Outline view b) Normal view c) Notes View d)))) Handouts view

26. …………..view allows to view miniature images of all the slides in the presentation? a) Notes View b) Outline view c) Slide Sorter d) Normal view

27. Which view is used when the presentation is to be printed and distributed as a handout? a) Outline view b) Normal view c) Notes View d)))) Handouts view

28. Which view is used to rearrange the slides? a) Normal View/Outline view b) Normal view / Notes view c) Notes View/Handout view d)))) Outline view/Slide sorter view

29. Which page can be used to specify the basic background information that needs to be included in all the slides?

a) Master page b) Layouts c) Slide transition d) Custom Animation

30. Which page displays the various layouts provided by Star Office Impress? a) Outline view b) Normal view c) Notes View d) Handouts view

31. Which page displays various options that allows you to add or modify animation effects to elements of a slide? a) Master page b) Layouts c) Slide transition d) Custom Animation

32. ……….page displays various effects that can be attached to a slide along with other options? a) Slide transition b) Custom Animation c) Master page d) Layouts

33. Which command is used to saving a presentation? a) Edit�Save b) File����Save c) View�Save d) Tools�Save

34. Which shortcut key is used to saving a presentation? a) Ctrl+B b) Ctrl+S c) Ctrl+A d) Ctrl+X

35. Which command is used to start a presentation? a) Edit�Slide Show b) Slide Show����Slide Show c) View�Slide Show d) File�Slide Show

36. Which key is used to start a presentation? a) F1 b) F5 c) F11 d) F7

37. Which icon is used to start a presentation? a) Slide Show b) Run Slide c) Slide Run d) Start Slide

38. Which key is used to end a presentation before the end? a) Ctrl b) Alt c) End d)))) ESC

Page 30: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

30 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

39. Presentation settings can be adjusted using the command? a) Slide Show�Settings b) Slide Show ����Slide Show Settings c) Slide�Slide Settings d) Slide�Slide Design

40. Which command is used to insert a slide in the presentation? a) Insert����Slide b) Slide �Insert c) Add�Slide d) File�Slide Insert

41. If you want to delete a slide, select the slide and press…………..key. a) Backspace b) Delete c) Erase d) Enter

42. If you want to delete a slide, right click on the slide and choose ………….option. a) Delete Slide b) Remove Slide c) Erase Slide d) Cancel Slide

43. Which command is used to rename a slide? a) Rename-�Slide b) Slide�Rename c) Slideshow�Rename d) Slide����Rename Slide

44. To rename a slide, right click on the slide and choose………..option. a) Slide name b) Slide Change name c) Rename Slide d) Slide Rename

45. Which command is used to insert a picture in a slide in the presentation? a) Insert�Picture b) Insert����Picture����From file c) Insert�Slide picture d) File�Slide Insert

46. Which command is used to insert a movie in a slide? a) Insert����Movie and Sound b) Insert�Picture�From file c) Insert�Slide picture d) File�Slide Insert

47. Star Office Impress enables……………where you can preview movie and sound files? a) Media Player b) Multimedia player c) Movie Player d) Audio Player

48. Which icon plays the current file? a) Play Icon b) Pause Icon c) Stop Icon d) Mute Icon

49. Which icon pauses or resumes the playback of the current file? a) Play Icon b) Pause Icon c) Stop Icon d) Mute Icon

50. Which icon stops the playback of the current file? a) Play Icon b) Pause Icon c) Stop Icon d) Mute Icon

51. Which icon plays the file repeatedly? a) Repeat Icon b) Pause Icon c) Stop Icon d) Mute Icon

52. Which icon turns sound off and on? a) Repeat Icon b) Pause Icon c) Position Icon d)))) Mute Icon

53. Which icon adjusts the volume? a) Repeat Icon b) Pause Icon c) Position Icon d)))) Volume Slider Icon

54. Which icon adjusts the size of the movie playback? a) Repeat Icon b) Zoom Icon c) Position Icon d) Mute Icon

55. Which icon moves to a different position in the file? a) Repeat Icon b) Pause Icon c) Position Icon d) Mute Icon

56. Click the………….icon to apply the selected movie or video into the presentation? a) Apply Icon b) Pause Icon c) Position Icon d) Mute Icon

57. Which command is used to open Media Player? a) File�Media Player b) Tools����Media Player c) Edit�Media Player d) Insert�Media Player

58. Which command is used to insert an object in a slide? a) Insert� Slide Objects b) Insert����Object c) Insert� Object file d) Insert�Object type

Page 31: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

31 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

59. Which command is used to import from other applications into a presentation? a) Insert OLE Object b) Insert Applet c) Insert Plug in d) Insert Other Objects

60. Various effects can be assigned to the slides using the……………..view. a) Outline view b) Normal view c) Notes View d) Handouts view

61. Which command is used to assign animation effects to the objects in a slide? a) Slide Show����Custom Animation b) Custom Animation �Slide Show c) Slide Show�Slide Design d) Slide�Animation

62. To Change the slide background………. a) Format����Page����Background b) Insert�Page�Background c) Tools�Page�Background d) Edit�Page�Background

63. Which command is used to change the background color or the background fill of the current slide or all the slides in your document? a) Format����Page����Background b) Insert�Page�Background c) Tools�Page�Background d) Edit�Page�Background

64. Which is not a Background fill option? a) Color b) Gradient c) Picture d) Hatching

65. Which command is used to apply a slide design to a master slide? a) Format����Slide Design b) Tools�Slide Design c) View�Slide Design d) File�Slide Design

66. Which button is used to get the styles and formatting window? a) F5 b) F7 c) F11 d) F12

67. Open the stylelist by choosing……………. a) Format����Styles and formatting b) Format�Style list

c) Tools�Styles and formatting d) Styles and formatting 68. Which command is used to create a custom slideshow?

a) Slide Show����Custom Slide Show b) Tools�Custom Slide Show c) Slide Show�Slide Design d) Slide show�Animation

69. Which key is used to select a range of slides? a) Shift b) Alt c) Ctrl d) Tab

70. Which key is used to select multiple slides? a) Shift b) Alt c) Ctrl d) Tab

71. Which command is used to start a slide show from the current slide? a) Tools����Options����Star Office Impress����General b) Edit�Options�Star Office Impress�General c) File�Options�Star Office Impress�General d) View�Options�Star Office Impress�General

72. The command is used to hide and show the slide? a) Slide show/Hide b) Slide show����Show/Hide Slide c) Tools� Show/Hide Slide d) Slide�Show/Hide

73. Which command is used to show a hidden slide? a) Slide show/Hide b) Slide show����Show/Hide Slide c) Tools� Show/Hide Slide d) Slide�Show/Hide

74. Which command is used to record a show with rehearse timings? a) Slide Show����Rehearse Timings b) Tools� Rehearse Timings c) Slide Show�Record Timings d) Slide show�Time Record

75. Which command is used to set the default printing options? a) Tools����Options����Star Office Impress����Print b) Edit�Options�Star Office Impress�Print c) File�Options�Star Office Impress�Print d) View�Options�Star Office Impress�Print

Page 32: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

32 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

76. If you want the whole presentation to auto-repeat choose the command…………. a) Slide Show���� Slide Show Settings b) Slide� Slide Settings c) Slide Show�Settings d) Tools�Slide Settings

77. Which command is used to set printer options for the current presentation? a) Tools�Print b) Edit �Print c) File����Print d) Insert�Print

78. The command to get print dialog box is…………… a) Tools�Print b) Edit �Print c) File����Print d) Insert�Print

79. Which key combination is used to print in Star Office? a) Alt + P b) Shift + P c) Shift + Alt + P d) Ctrl + P

80. Which command is used to reduce the size of a slide when you print, so that the slide can fit on a printed page? a) File�Print�Page b) Format����Page c) File�Print d) Tools�Page

81. If you want to specific settings for all presentations, choose the command………….. a) Tools����Options����Star Office Impress����Print b) Edit�Options�Star Office Impress�Print c) File�Options�Star Office Impress�Print d) View�Options�Star Office Impress�Print

82. Which is used to move from slide to slide quickly? a) Moving b) Navigator c) Editing d) Copying

83. Which command is used to open Navigator? a) Tools�Navigator b) Edit ����Navigator c) View�Navigator d) Insert�Navigator

84. Which command is used to open the HTML export wizard? a) Insert�Export b) Tools�Export c) View�Export d)))) File����Export

85. In which format a presentation can be exported? a) PDF b) SWF c) Web Page d)))) All of these

86. To change the slide order, the switching presentation view tab click………… a) Notes View b) Outline view c) Slide Sorter d) Normal view

87. The menu used to open Media Player in Star Office Impress is……. a) Tools b) Edit c) View d) Insert

88. Which is used for performing calculation in presentation? a) Insert Formula b) Insert OLE Object c) Insert Applet d) Insert Object

89. The view used to reorder slide is a) Normal b) Outline c) Handouts d) Notes view

Page 33: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

33 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

Volume-II [C++]

1. …………..is a tool to solve a wide range of problems. a) Programs b) Computer c) Hardware d) Software

2. The solutions to the problems are in the form of……… a) Computer programs b) application software c) Both A & B d) hardware

3. Which operates on a set of known input data items? a) Application software b) hardware c) computer programs d) Operating System

4. In the early programming languages the input and output data items were represented as………….. a) Variables b) Constants c) Operators d) Expressions

5. Which categorized the input data items? a) Constants b) Operators c) Variables d) Data types

6. Which statements provided a way of instructing the computer on the operations that need to be performed on the data items? a) Output b) Control c) Call d) Input

7. The solution of a problem is viewed as………….segments. a) 1 b) 2 c) 3 d) 4

8. Which of the following is an object oriented programming language? a) Basic b) Pascal c) C++ d) C

9. Which programming facilities the way of problem solving by combining data and operations that are to be performed on the data? a) Object oriented b) Application oriented c) Data oriented d) System oriented

10. ..………..and…………...together are termed as object? a) Data, program b) Group of data, operations c) Data, Hardware d) Program, operations

11. Which represents the behavior of an object? a) Constants b) Data c) Operations d) variables

12. Which attempts to capture a real world object in a program? a) Data b) Object c) behavior d) operations

13. Which refers to the physical features of an object? a) State b) Data c) Operations d) behavior

14. Which is group of related functions and data serves those functions? a) Constant b) class c) object d) Program

15. Which is a kind of a self-sufficient “sub program” with a specific functional area. a) Object b) program c) variable d) Constant

16. The process of grouping data and its related functions into units called as objects paves way for……… a) Class b) polymorphism c) Encapsulation d) functions

17. The mechanism of by which the data and functions are bound together within an object definition is called as…………. a) Encapsulation b) polymorphism c) functions d) Class

18. Which make it easy to represent real systems in software programs? a) Objects b) program c) variable d) Constant

CHAPTER-1: Object Oriented Concepts Using C++

Page 34: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

34 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

19. The ability of an object to respond differently to different messages is called as………… a) Class b) Inheritance c) polymorphism d) Data hiding

20. Which data type conventionally represents an object in the real world? a) Class b) polymorphism c) Encapsulation d) functions

21. A template for entities that have common behavior is……. a) Object b) data c) inheritance d) Class

22. Which classes are power packed as they include the functionally of the base class along with their own unique features? a) Base b) Real c) Derived d) Object

23. Which classes are power packed? a) Derived b) Object c) Real d) Base

24. The process of acquiring the base class properties is called……………. a) Class b) Inheritance c) polymorphism d) Data hiding

25. Which increases the functionality of a derived class? a) Inheritance b) polymorphism c) Data hiding d) Class

26. Which data type allows programs to organize as objects that contain both data and functions? a) Class b) polymorphism c) Encapsulation d) functions

27. Which makes the functions defined outside the class cannot access the data? a) Data hiding b) Data abstraction c) Encapsulation d) Both A or B

28. Which provides security to data? a) Encapsulation b) Data Hiding c) Class d) Inheritance

29. Which reduces software complexity as multiple definitions are permitted to an operator or function? a) Polymorphism b) Inheritance c) Class d) Encapsulation

30. Which allows a class to be derived from an existing class? a) Inheritance b) polymorphism c) Data hiding d) Class

31. Which promotes reusability of code? a) Class b) Inheritance c) polymorphism d) Data hiding

32. ………..communicative with one another by sending data as inputs. a) Inheritance b) polymorphism c) Data hiding d) Class

33. C++ belongs to which category of programming language? a) Object Oriented b) Structure c) Procedure d) Modular

Page 35: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

35 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

1. C++ was developed by…………… a) Rick Mascity b) Bjrane Stroustrup c) Denis Ritchie d) Charles Babbage

2. C++ was developed in the early years of………… a) 1985 b) 1982 c) 1980) 1980) 1980) 1980 d) 1997

3. The name C++ was coined by………….. a) Charles Babbage b) Denis Ritchie c) Bjrane Stroustrup d) Rick Mascity

4. C++ was developed at…………. a) Sun Micro System b) Microsoft Corporation c) AT & T Bell Laboratories d) L & T Bell

5. Which is the C increment operator? a) + b) ++) ++) ++) ++ c) - d) --

6. Which of the basic types of elements essential programming code? a) Tokens b) Programs c) Operations d) Variables

7. From which the tokens are constructed? a) Constants b) Variables c) Operators d) Character Set

8. The basic types are collectively called as………… a) Tokens b) Programs c) Operations d) Variables

9. Which is smallest unit individual unit in program? a) Programs b) Variables c) Tokens d) Operations

10. Tokens are classified into………..types. a) 5 b) 6 c) 4 d) 3

11. Which have special meaning to the language compiler? a) Programs b) Keywords c) Tokens d) Operations

12. ………….is a reserved words for special purpose? a) Keywords b) Programs c) Operations d) Variables

13. Which of the following cannot be used as normal identifiers? a) Programs b) Keywords c) Tokens d) Operations

14. Which of the following is not a keyword? a) cont b) const c) while d) do

15. …………are memory boxes that hold values or constants? a) Keywords b) Programs c) Operations d) Variables

16. A variable name must start with………….. a) Alphabet or Underscore b) symbols c) Number d) Number or symbols

17. Which is a valid variable name? a) avg& b) total+ c) num# d) _10marks

18. Which is invalid variable declaration? a) int a;b; b) int a,b; c) int a; d) int a,b,c;

19. Which is valid variable declaration? a) 10num b) _test c) avg+ d) _num#

20. Data items whose values cannot be changed are……….. a) Constants b) Variables c) Operators d) Character Set

21. Which of the following valid identifier? a) test b) -test c) –t*3 d) 2test

CHAPTER-2: Overview of C++

Page 36: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

36 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

22. Numeric constants consist of only……….. a) Whole numbers b) Decimal numbers c) Whole numbers or string d) Whole numbers or decimal numbers

23. Which constant must not contain any fractional part? a) Character b) Float c) Integer d) Char

24. A sequence of digits starting with……….is treated as Hexadecimal constant? a) ‘\XO’ b) ‘\0’ c) ‘\t’ d) ‘\0x’

25. A sequence of digits starting with……….is treated as Octal constant? a) 1 b) 0 c) OX d) XO

26. Which of the following is treated as octal constant? a) 010 b) 810 c) 0x8 d) 0x1

27. Which of the following is treated as Hexadecimal constant? a) 015 b) 0xF c) 15 d) F

28. Which is signed real number? a) Character constant b) Float point constant c) Integer constant d) String constant

29. There are………..parts in a floating point constant? a) 4 b) 3 c) 5 d) 6

30. Which of the following is not a floating point constant? a) 0.05864 b) 4 c) 0.5864 d) 58.64

31. Which letter is used to represent the floating point constant in exponent form? a) E or e b) F or f c) D or d d) B or b

32. A constant that contains a single character enclosed within single quotes is……………. a) Integer constant b) string constant c) Character Constant d) Floating Point Constant

33. Which is called as escape sequences? a) Character constant b) Float point constant c) Integer constant d) String constant

34. The escape sequences are representing using………..prefixed with a backslash. a) Float point constant b) String constant c) Character constant d) Integer constant

35. Which symbol is used in character constants? a) ‘ ’ b) “ ” c) ( ) d) { }

36. Escape sequences are prefixed with a……………. a) Null b) tab c) backslash d) backspace

37. The escape sequence for bell sound is………………. a) ‘\n’ b) ‘\t’ c) ‘\a’ d) ‘\v’

38. The escape sequence for new line or line feed…….. a) ‘\a’ b) ‘\t’ c) ‘\n’ d) ‘\v’

39. The escape sequence for Horizontal tab…….. a) ‘\n’ b) ‘\t’ c) ‘\a’ d) ‘\v’

40. The escape sequence for Vertical tab………. a) ‘\v’ b) ‘\t’ c) ‘\n’ d) ‘\a’

41. The escape sequence for Hexadecimal……… a) \a b) \0 c) ) ) ) \x d) \b

42. The escape sequence for null………. a) \a b) ) ) ) \0 c) \x d) \b

43. Which is a sequence of characters surrounded by double quotes? a) Float point constant b) String Literal c) Character constant d) Integer constant

Page 37: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

37 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

44. String literals are surrounded by……….. a) ’ ‘ b) “ ” c) ( ) d) { }

45. Which are treated as array of characters? a) Integer constant b) String Literal c) Variables d) Character constant

46. Each string literal is by default added with a special character…………… a) ‘\t’ b) ‘\a’ c) ‘\0’ d) ‘\v’

47. Which specifies an operation to be performed that yields a value? a) Operand b) Variable c) Escape sequence d) Operator

48. An entity on which operator acts is……… a) Variable b) Operand c) Operator d) Escape sequence

49. Which of the following operator is specific to C++? a) .* b) :: c) �* d) All o f these

50. Which operators are used only by the preprocessors? a) # b) ## c) Both A&B d) $

51. How many types the operators are classified based on operand requirements? a) 3 b) 2 c) 4 d) 13

52. Which operator requires one operand? a) Binary b) Unary c) Ternary d) Conditional

53. Which operator requires two operands? a) Ternary b) Binary c) Unary d) Sizeof( )

54. Which operator requires three operands? a) Binary b) Unary c) Ternary d) All of these

55. Which operators are used to perform mathematical operations? a) Logical b) Arithmetic c) Relational d) Conditional

56. Which operators gives the remainder of an integer division? a) / b) /= c) % d) *

57. Which are used to form an arithmetic expression? a) Arithmetic operators b) function call c) numerical constants/variables d) All of these

58. Operators are executed in the order of…………. a) Operand b) Precedence c) Logic d) Place value

59. The logical grouping of operands and operators are called as…………… a) Association b) Operations c) expression d) expression

60. Which operator has the associativity right to left? a) Perfix ++ b) Postfix ++ c) ( ) d) %

61. 5+6/3=……………….. a) 9 b) 7 c) 10 d) 16

62. 5*6/3=………………... a) 10 b) 30 c) 12 d) 15

63. 1+pow(3,2)=………………. a) 9 b) 10 c) 12 d) 11

64. 1+pow(3,3)=……………………. a) 9 b) 28 c) 10 d) 7

65. Evaluate the 1+pow(3,2) [(3+2)*(8-7)+2]……………….is a) 64 b) 65 c) 66 d) 67

Page 38: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

38 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

66. If a=5; c=a++; then the value stored in c is……… a) 6 b) 7 c) 5) 5) 5) 5 d) 4

67. If a=5; c= ++a; then the value stored in c is……… a) 7 b) 6) 6) 6) 6 c) 4 d) 5

68. If a=5; c=a--; then the value stored in c is……… a) 6 b) 7 c) 5) 5) 5) 5 d) 4

69. If a=5; c=--a; then the value stored in c is……… a) 7 b) 6 c) 4) 4) 4) 4 d) 5

70. x=10,f=20; c=x++ + ++f; then the value stored in X is……… a) 32 b) 30 c) 31) 31) 31) 31 d) 29

71. fun=1,sim=2; final=--fun+ ++sim-fun--; then the value stored in final is……… a) 3) 3) 3) 3 b) 0 c) 2 d) 1

72. If a=5,b=5 then a=a+b++; then what is the value stored in a? a) 5 b)10 c) 11 d) 12

73. Which operators are used to compare the values? a) Logical b) Arithmetic c) Relational d) Conditional

74. A relational expression is constructed using any………operands connected by a relational operator? a) 4 b) 3 c) 2) 2) 2) 2 d) 1

75. Relational operator have lower precedence than the…………………….operators. a) Relational b) Arithmetic c) Conditional d) Logical

76. Which operators have lower precedence to relational and arithmetic operators? a) Relational b) Arithmetic c) Conditional d) Logical

77. Which represents false value? a) 0) 0) 0) 0 b) 1 c) 10 d) 9

78. Any nonzero constant represents ………………value. a) 0(False) b) 1(True) c) 10 d) 9

79. (99!=99.5) What is the result of an expression? a) 0(False) b) 1(True) c) 10 d) 9

80. (9= =9) What is the result of an expression? a) 10 b) 9 c) 1(True) d) 0(False)

81. (5= =6) What is the result of an expression? a) 0(False) b) 1(True) c) 10 d) 9

82. What will be the value of the following expressions? (num1+num2+num3)/5*2<(num1%10) where num1=99,num2=20,num3=10 a) 0) 0) 0) 0 b) 1 c) 10 d) 9

83. Which operator combines the results of one or more condition? a) Logical b) Arithmetic c) Relational d) Conditional

84. What is the value of the expression 6<5&&5+10? a) 1 b) 0 c) 15 d) 16

85. A ternary operator is also called as…………… a) Logical Operator b) Arithmetic Operator c) Unary Operator d) Conditional Operator

86. Which is a ternary operator? a) % b) ++ c) ?: d) &

87. Which is a condition in the general syntax E1?E2:E3; a) E3 b) E2 c) E1 d) All of these

Page 39: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

39 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

88. If a=10,b=10; x=(a<b)?a*a:b%a; What is the value of x? a) 100 b) 10 c) 0 d) 1

89. Which is simple assignment operator? a) == b) = c) * d) ::

90. There are how many shorthand assignment operators in C++? a) 2 b) 10 c) 4 d) 8

91. Which operator is used to assign the result of an expression to the variable? a) Logical Operator b) Arithmetic Operator c) Unary Operator d) Assignment Operator

92. If A=5;A+=2; What is the value of A? a) 5 b) 7 c) 10 d) 9

93. A=2;A/=2; What is the value of A? a) 1 b) 7 c) 10 d) 9

94. A=5;A*=2; What is the value of A? a) 1 b) 7 c) 10 d) 8

95. A=5;A-=2; What is the value of A? a) 5 b) 7 c) 3 d) 6

96. A=6;A%=2; What is the value of A? a) 1 b) 0 c) 10 d) 5

97. a=5,b=6,c=7; a+ = b*c; then what is the value stored in a? a) 45 b) 47 c) 46 d) 48

98. a=5,b=6,c=7; c*=a+a/b; what is the value of C? a) 35 b) 47 c) 77 d) 40

99. Which are characters with specific function? a) Keywords b) Punctuators c) Variables d) Operators

100. Which punctuator terminates a C++ statement? a) : b) , c) “ “ d) ;

101. Which punctuator treats as comments? a) [ ] b) // c) “ ” d) { }

102. Blocks enclosed within ……………are treat as comment? a) /* */ b) “ ” c) ( ) d) [ ]

103. Which are used to group a set of C++ statements? a) ( ) b) \*…..*\ c) { } d) [ ]

104. The index value for an element in an array is indicated with in………….symbols. a) { } b) “ “ c) [ ] d) ( )

105. Which punctuator is used to enclose a single character? a) ‘ ’ b) “ “ c) { } d) [ ]

106. Which punctuator is used to enclose a set of character? a) /* */ b) “ ” c) ( ) d) [ ]

107. Which are the kind of data that variables hold in a programming language? a) Keywords b) Punctuators c) Data types d) String Literals

108. Data is grouped into different categories into…………….reasons? a) 2 b) 3 c) 4 d) 5

109. C++ data types can be broadly classified into………….categories? a) 4 b) 2 c) 3 d) 1

110. Which of the following is not a C++ data type? a) User defined type b) Built-in type c) Conditional type d) Derived type

Page 40: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

40 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

111. Which data type helps in improving readability of the program? a) Built-in type b) User defined type c) Derived type d) Conditional type

112. Which data type enables a programmer to invent his/her own data type and define values it can assume? a) User defined type b) Built-in type c) Conditional type d) Derived type

113. Which allows users to define a variable that would represent an existing data? a) Derived type b) Type cast c) Type definition d) Operators

114. ………..allow users to define user defined data type identifier. a) Type definition b) Derived type c) Operators d) Type cast

115. ……….helps in creating meaningful data type identifier. a) Type cast b) Type def c) enum d) Const

116. Which data type helps users in creating a list of identifiers of type int? a) Derived b) Type cast c) enumerated d) Typedef

117. Which data type is also called as symbolic numeric constants of type int? a) enumerated b) Typedef c) Derived d) Type cast

118. …………..is a qualifier that can be added to a variable declaration. a) Typedef b) enumerated c) Storage Class d) built-in type

119. How many types of storage class in C++? a) 3 b) 5 c) 6 d) 4

120. Which of the following is not a Storage specifier? a) Auto b) Extern c) Static d) Typeder

121. Which variables are automatically initialized to 0(zero) when they are declared? a) Extern, Register b) Auto, Static c) Static, Register d) Auto, extern

122. Which modifier allows the variable to exist in the memory of the computer, even if its function within which it is declared losses its scope?

a) Extern b) Static c) Register d) Auto 123. Which variables get undefined values known as garbage?

a) Auto b) Extern c) Static d) Register 124. Which variables are not initialized with appropriate values based on their data type?

a) Extern b) Static c) Register d) Auto 125. ……….variables are defined with in another program?

a) Auto b) Extern c) Static d) Register 126. By default the local variables are……………

a) Auto b) Extern c) Static d) Register 127. Which modifier instructs the computer to store the variable in the CPU register to optimize access?

a) Extern b) Static c) Register d) Auto 128. Which modifier is used to optimize access?

a) Auto b) Extern c) Static d) Register 129. Which variables is global variable known to all function in the current program?

a) Extern b) Static c) Register d) Auto 130. Which data types are also called as Fundamental or basic data types?

a) User defined type b) Built-in type c) Conditional type d) Derived type 131. Which data types are predefined in the compiler

a) Conditional type b) Derived type c) Built-in type d) User defined type 132. There are………………fundamental data types.

a) 3 b) 5 c) 6 d) 4

Page 41: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

41 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

133. Which of the following is not fundamental data type? a) Integral b) float c) Void d) Type definition

134. Integral type is further into…………...and…………… a) int, char b) float, double c) int, float d) void, float

135. Char data can hold……………data a) Character data b) Integer data c) float, character d) Character, integer

136. The ASCII value for ‘A’ is……….. a) 66 b) 63 c) 65 d) 67

137. Floating data type is divided into……………and…………… a) Char, int b) int, void c) float, double d) int, float

138. Which data type is used to indicate that a function does not return a value? a) int b) Void c) double d) float

139. Which data type is used to declare a generic pointer? a) int b) char c) float d) void

140. Void data type has………….important purposes? a) 4 b) 8 c) 1 d) 2

141. ………..have a profound effect in the internal representation of data? a) Modifiers b) enumerated c) Type definition d) Unions

142. ………………data types are built from the basic built in type or user defined data type. a) Storage class b) type definition c) Derived d) user defined

143. What is the size of char data type? a) 4 b) 8 c) 1 d) 2

144. The size of int data type is………….byes a) 1 b) 4 c) 2 d) 10

145. The size of float data type is…………bytes. a) 2 b) 4) 4) 4) 4 c) 10 d) 8

146. The size of double data type is………….bytes a) 2 b) 8 c) 4 d) 60

147. What is the size of long double data type? a) 8 b) 4 c) 2 d) 10

148. The range of char data type is…………… a) 0 to 255 b) -128 to +127 c) 0 to 65535 d) -32767 to +32768

149. What is the range of int data type? a) -32678 to +32677 b) 0 to 65535 c) -32768 to +32767 d) -32767 to +32768

150. Which is a derived data type? a) class b) enum c) union d) Array

151. Which is a user defined data type? a) Array b) Class c) function d) pointer

152. ………is a variable that holds a memory address. a) Pointer b) extern c) built-in d) enum

153. The memory address number starts at………………… a) OX b) 1 c) Null d) 100

154. Which operators are used deal with pointer data type? a) & , ! b) & , * c) #, % d) &, @

155. Which of the following address of operator? a) $ b) * c) & d) @

Page 42: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

42 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

156. Which of the following value at operator? a) @ b) * c) & d) #

157. Which symbol is used to declare generic pointer? a) % b) # c) ? d) *

158. Which of the following is not a unary operator? a) ++ b) * c) -- d) >

159. The name assigned to a data field that can assume any of a given set of values is defined as the ………... a) Programs b) Variables c) Tokens d) Operations

160. ……………are user defined named entities of memory for internal that can store data. a) Keywords b) Tokens c) Variables d) Constants

161. The name beginning with…………..are reserved for internal system variables. a) _(Underscore) b) * c) # d) &

162. Which of the following variable name is in valid declaration? a) int a;b; b) int a, float b; c) int float; d) int a,b;

163. ………….allocates memory based on the data type of the variable. a) Compiler b) address c) pointer d) enumerated

164. If more than one variable of the same data type is declared in a single declaration statement, every variable should be separated by……… a) colon b) comma c) dot d) semi colon

165. There are…………….words for data types. a) 10 b) 6 c) 9 d) 7

166. Which built-in data type can not be modified using modifiers a) int b) float c) char d) void

167. Integer values are stored in…………………..bit formats in binary form? a) 16 b) 8 c) 10 d) 15

168. Maximum value stored in an integer variable is………….. a) -32768 b) +32767 c) 65535 d) 127

169. Minimum value stores in an integer variable is………….. a) -32768 b) +32767 c) 65535 d) 127

170. Which bit is called as the Most Significant Bit or Sign Bit? a) 15th b) 10th c) 8th d) 16th

171. The 16th bit will have a value…………….if negative value is stored. a) 1 b) 0 c) -1 d) -0

172. The 16th bit will have a value………….if positive value is stored. a) 1 b) 0 c) -1 d) -0

173. When the modifier unsigned is used the integer data type will store a maximum value of………. a) 0 to 255 b) -128 to +127 c) 0 to 65535 d) -32767 to +32768

174. Which alters the base data type to yield new data type? a) Modifiers b) Storage Class c) Enum d) Typedef

175. Which modifiers the range of the integer values as the sign bit also used to store data? a) Short b) Unsigned c) const d) char

176. Which modifiers increases the bytes for a particular data type, thus increasing the range of values? a) Short b) long c) const d) char

177. Which qualifier specifies that the value of a variable will not change during the run time of a program? a) typedef b) cont c) const d) new

Page 43: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

43 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

178. Which refers to data type changes brought about in expressions by the compiler? a) Implicit conversion b) Storage Class c) Enum d) Type cast

179. If f=7.6; int x=f; then what is the value of x? a) 7 b) 7.6 c) 6 d) 7.66

180. Which data type does not return any value? a) int b) char c) void d) float

181. Which data type accepts both number and character? a) Char b) int c) Void d) Float

182. Which of the following is not a keyword? a) private b) sizeof c) size d) return

183. int a,b,c; a=6,b=7; c=(a++)-(--b); cout<<c; What is output of this program? a) 1 b) -1 c) 13 d) 0

184. int i=6; unsigned int j=10; cout<<sizeof(i*j); What is output of this program?

a) 2 b) 4 c) 8 d) 60 185. ……………operator returns the size in terms of bytes, of the given expression or data type?

a) new b) sizeof c) Assignment d) this 186. Sizeof( ) is a…………….

a) Data type b) Operator c) Variable d) Constant 187. ……….variables are sensitive to the data type they point to.

a) Static b) extern c) Pointer d) auto 188. Which refers to the process of changing the data type of the value stored in a variable?

a) Type definition b) Type cast c) Storage class d) modifier 189. ……………is a variable that holds a memory address.

a) Tokens b) Constant c) Pointer d) Operator 190. If more than one variable of the same data types is declared in a single declaration statement, every

variable should be separated by……… a) dot b) comma c) colen d) semicolen

191. Which is restricted only to fundamental or standard data types? a) Type definition b) Type cast c) Storage class d) modifier

192. Which of the following is a derived data type? a) Union b) Float c) double d) Array

193. Which of the following is not a keyword? a) inline b) this c) struct d) Test

194. Which of the following is not a keyword? a) auto b) goto c) Constant d) const

195. Which of the following is not a keyword? a) this b) new c) friend d) cont

196. If a=5 and b=4, then value of the expression a+b/2*6 is………. a) 17 b) 16 c) 18 d) 19

Page 44: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

44 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

197. The range of singed int data type is………… a) -32678 to +32677 b) 0 to 65535 c) -32768 to +32767 d) -32767 to +32768

198. How many bytes does the unsigned int data type occupy? a) 2 b) 4 c) 8 d) 10

199. Which of the following scope resolution operator? a) = b) & c) : : d) #

200. Which of the following operators is called conditional operator? a) ? : b) $ c) ^ d) : :

201. Unary operators require how many operands? a) Three b) Two c) One d) Four

202. Binary operators require how many operands? a) One b) Three c) Four d) Two

203. Ternary operators require how many operands? a) Three b) Two c) One d) Four

204. int x; x=7/3; then the value stored in X?

a) 2.33 b) 2 c) 3.33 d) 3 205. float x;

x=7/3; then the value stored in X? a) 2.33 b) 2 c) 3.33 d) 3

206. float x; x=7.0/3.0; then the value stored in X?

a) 2.33 b) 2 c) 3.33 d) 3 207. float x;

x=(float)7/3; then the value stored in X? a) 2.33 b) 2 c) 3.33 d) 3

208. float x; int a=7,b=3; x= a/b; then the value stored in X?

a) 2.33 b) 2 c) 3.33 d) 3 209. float x;

int a=7,b=3; x= a/(float)b; then the value stored in X?

a) 2.33 b) 2 c) 3.33 d) 3 210. 0.5864E1 is equal to………………..

a) 5.864 b) 0.0586 c) 58.64 d) 0.5864

Page 45: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

45 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

1. Basic statements in C++ are constructed using………….. a) Tokens b) variables c) constants d) operators

2. How many methods are there for assigning data to the variables? a) 3 b) 2 c) 4 d) 5

3. Which object is used to read data from the key board during runtime? a) cout b) scanf c) cin d) printf

4. Which is a predefined object in C++? a) inc b) cin c) read d) input

5. Which is a predefined object that corresponds of to a standard input stream. a) printf b) scanf c) cin d) cout

6. ……….represents the flow of data from the standard input device the keyboard. a) Output stream b) Object c) Input stream d) printf

7. Which can read data from other sources? a) cout b) scanf c) cin d) printf

8. In which header file the declarations for the object cin are available? a) istream.h b) ostream.h c) math.h d) string.h

9. In which header file the declarations for the object cout are available? a) math.h b) string.h c) ostream.h d) istream.h

10. The basic input/output operations are managed by a set of declarations available in the……….header file. a) istream.h b) ostream.h c) math.h d) iostream.h

11. Which header file comprises the combined properties of stream and ostream? a) stdio.h b) conio.h c) string.h d) iostream.h

12. A…………..file comprises of all standard declarations and definitions for predefined functions. a) input b) declaration c) header d) output

13. One can include the header file in the program by using………… a) Preprocessor directive b) input statement c) function call d) returning

14. A preprocessor directive starts with……….. a) $ b) @ c) # d) &

15. In order to use cin/cout objects one has to include…………..in the program. a) iostream.h b) ostream.h c) math.h d) stdio.h

16. Which is the extraction or get from operator? a) >> b) << c) < d) >

17. Which operator takes the value from the stream object to its left and places it in the variable to its right? a) >> b) << c) < d) >

18. ……………is a predefined object of standard output stream. a) printf b) scanf c) cin d) cout

19. Which is called the insertion operator or put operator? a) >> b) << c) < d) >

20. Which directs the contents of the variable to its right to the object its left? a) >> b) << c) < d) >

21. A C++ program has primarily ………….sections. a) 3 b) 5 c) 6 d) 4

22. On successful compilation when the program is executed………….will be automatically executed? a) main( ) function b) calling statement c) user defined function d) output function

CHAPTER-3: Basic Statements

Page 46: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

46 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

23. Which of the following is not a primary section of a C++ program? a) Include files b) declaration of user defined functions c) main( ) function d) calling statement

24. Which introduces a variable name’s and its associated data type? a) Declaration of variable b) main( ) function c) function call statement d) preprocessor directive

25. Which variables are defined only when memory is fetched to store data? a) Integer b) float c) character d) pointer

26. If a declaration also aside memory for the variable it is called as………….. a) Operation b) definition c) undefined d) assignment

27. Which statement assigns value on the right hand side of an expression to the variable on the let hand side? a) Assignment b) Operation c) definition d) undefined

28. ………..is the simple assignment operator. a) = = b) += c) = d) &

29. Program statements that cause a jump of control one part of program to another are called as…..statements a) Control b) input c) output d) function call

30. There are ……………major categories in control structures? a) 4 b) 1 c) 2 d) 3

31. Two major categories of control structures are………….and ………….. a) Input statements, output statements b) Decision making statements, looping statements c) Object message, return statements d) Declaration, Assignment statements

32. The decision making statements are also known as…………….statements. a) Selection b) calling c) looping d) input

33. Which statement chooses between two alter natives……………. a) switch b) nested…if c) for d) if……else

34. Which statement creates branches for multiple alternatives sections of code, depending on the value of a single variable? a) for b) if….else c) switch d) if

35. Which is the simplest of the all the decision statements? a) switch b) nested…if c) for d) if

36. if statements implemented in…………ways. a) 1 b) 4 c) 3 d) 2

37. Any nonzero positive integer indicates……………state. a) False b) 0 c) True d) negative

38. Which statements executes the chosen block based on the condition? a) for b) if….else c) switch d) if

39. Which appropriate if construct is used to set grade to ‘A’ if mark is above 90? a) if mark>90; cout<<”A”; b) if[mark>90] cout<<”A”; c) if(mark>90) cout<<”A”; d) if{mark>90} cout<<”A”;

40. Which statements sequence of if or else contains another if statement, it is called as……………. a) nested…if b) primary if c) separate if d) sub if

41. Which is a multiple branching statements? a) if…else b) while c) for d) switch

42. Which statements transfers control to one of the many possible points? a) Switch b) nested…if c) for d) if

Page 47: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

47 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

43. Which is multiple branching statement where, based on a condition, the control is transferred to one of many possible points? a) Switch b) nested…if c) for d) if

44. Every action block in switch statement should be terminated with a………….statement? a) Continue b) break c) case d) stop

45. Include……………statement in action block in order to exit from switch statement. a) break b) Stop c) goto d) Continue

46. if(a>b); cout<<”Heaven”; else cout<<”God”; The above program gives the…………………. error message? a) Placed Else b) Else Missed c) Misplaced Else d) Else Missing

47. ………executes a set of instructions repeatedly for a certain number of times. a) Loops b) selection statements c) command statements d) assignment statements

48. A looping block consists of…………..segments? a) 4 b) 1 c) 2 d) 3

49. What are the two segments of looping block? a) control, input b) input, output c) body of the loop, control statements d) input part, control statements

50. Based on the position of condition, the loops are classified into……………...types. a) 4 b) 3 c) 2 d) 5

51. There are…………kinds of loops in C++? a) 3 b) 2 c) 4 d) 1

52. Which is a entry controlled loop? a) for b) while c) both A&B d) do…while

53. for loop statements has……………sections. a) 2 b) 3 c) 4 d) 1

54. In for loop,……………is execute only once. a) increment b) test condition c) initialization d) body of the loop

55. Each segment in the for loop can comprise a set of instructions, each instruction should be separated by a …………………operator. a) ; b) : c) , d) .

56. Which of the following is not a loop? a) for b) while c) if…..else d) do…while

57. for(i=0;i<5;i++) how many times the loop execute? a) 4 b) 6 c) 7 d) 5

58. for(i=1;i<30;i++) how many times the loop execute? a) 30 b) 29 c) 31 d) 28

59. for(i=1;i<5;i++) how many times the loop execute? a) 4 b) 5 c) 6 d) 7

60. for(i=0;i<10;i++) how many times the loop execute? a) 11 b) 9 c) 10 d) 12

61. Which statement forces the next iteration of the loop to take place? a) exit b) break c) continue d) switch

Page 48: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

48 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

62. Which statement is used to terminate the loop irrespective of the expression in C++? a) Exit b) break c) continue d) switch

63. Which is called as exit check loop? a) for b) do…..while c) switch d) while

64. Which is called as entry-check loop? a) While b) if….else c) do……while d) switch

65. In which loop the test expression marks the last statement of the body of the loop? a) for b) do…..while c) switch d) while

66. Which loop is used when an action is to be repeated for a predetermined number of times? a) for b) do…..while c) switch d) while

67. Which statement accomplishes jump from the current loop or exit the current loop? a) Exit b) break c) continue d) switch

68. The break statements would exit only. a) Current loop b) current function c) current program d) none of these

69. If one loop is constructed inside the body of another loop then it is called………… a) inner loop b) Nested loop c) combined loop d) outer loop

70. A program written in high level language is called as………….. a) application file b) executable file c) object code d) Source code

71. The machine readable form of a program is called as………………….. a) Source code b) Object file c) compiler code d) binary code

72. ………………..create object files from source code. a) linkers b) debuggers c) application file d) Compilers

73. Which is linked with libraries to create an executable file? a) Object code b) source code c) programs d) Compiler

74. a…………..gets defined when memory is set aside. a) operators b) variable c) operand d) token

75. …………….statement is included in order to exit from switch statement. a) continue b) break c) default d) case

Read the following program and answer the Question No.76 to 79. #include<iostream.h> #include<conio.h> { clrscr( ): int x=3,y=4,ctr=2,res=x; while(ctr<=y) { res*=x; ctr+=1; } cout<<”X to the power of Y is”<<res; getch( ); }

76. What is the name of control variable? a) x b) y c) res d) ctr

77. What type of loop is used in this program? a) entry-check b) exit-check c) in-check d) out-check

Page 49: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

49 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

78. How many times this loop will be execute? a) 2 b) 3 c) 4 d) 1

79. What is the output of this program? a) 89 b) 88 c) 87 d) 81

80. …………..operator is used to separate a set of instructions in a for loop. a) . b) “ c) , d) ;

81. …………….of a variable introduces variable name & its associated type. a) association b) declaration c) operation d) none of these

82. …………….is called as entry check loop. a) for b) do…..while c) while d) both A&C

83. When a C++ is executed first the……………..function will be executed automatically. a) recursive b) main( ) c) void d) none of these

84. Nested if……else statement can be replaced by………….statement in C++. a) if b) if….else c) switch d) do…..while

85. Multiple values can be read from the input stream and placed in the corresponding variables by…………the extraction operator.

a) extraction b) do…..while c) while d) cascading 86. In …………….loop statement the condition is checked at the end.

a) for b) do…..while c) while d) switch 87. A loop execution is terminated when the test condition evaluates to……………….

a) true b) false c) 1 d) both a&b 88. A preprocessor directive starts with …………., which instructs the compiler to do the required job

a) :: b) @ c) # d) #@ 89. The invalid variable declaration statements in C++ in the following is…………

a) int a,b; b) int a;b; c) float num10; d) char ch=’65’; 90. The appropriate declaration statement to initialize the variable ‘name’ with the value “Abdul Kalam” is

a) char name=”Abdul Kalam”; b) char name[ ]=”Abdul Kalam”; c) char name[ ]=Abdul Kalam d) char [ ] name=”Abdul Kalam”; Read the following program and answer the Question No.91 to 95. #include<iostream.h>

#include<conio.h>

void main( )

{

int num=2;

do

{

cout<<num*num<<’\t’;

num+=1;

} while(num<=6);

getch( );

}

91. Name the control variable used in the program. a) cout b) cin c) do d) num

Page 50: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

50 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

92. What is the test expression(condition) used? a) (num<6) b) num*num c) num d) None of these

93. How many times will the loop be executed? a) 6 b) 4 c) 5 d) 3

94. What is the output of the following program? a) 2 4 9 16 25 b) 6 5 6 8 c) 4 9 16 25 d) 0 4 9 25

95. What type of loop statement is used in the program? a) entry-check b) exit-check c) in-check d) out-check

96. The int A;b; is invalid because? a) Only one variable should be given b) Capital A is not allowed c) Variables should be separated by comma d) All of these

97. In C++, which should be declared or defined before they are used in a program? a) Operators b) variables c) constants d) punctuators

98. Which of the following is in the invalid variable declaration? a) int a,b; b) int a; int b c) int a; float b; d) int a;b;

99. Which of the following is in the invalid variable declaration? a) int a,b; b) int a;b; c) int a=10; float b; d) int a; float b=10;

100. The variable used in for loop is called as……….

a) Control variable b) counting variable c) static variable d) for variable

Page 51: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

51 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

1. Which are the building blocks of C++ program.

a) Tokens b) classes c) Functions d) Statements 2. Which are also the executable segments in a program?

a) Functions b) Statements c) classes d) Tokens 3. The starting point for the execution of a program is…………..

a) Void b) main ( ) c) cin/cout d) #include<iostream.h> 4. Which reduce the size of program?

a) Tokens b) classes c) Functions d) Statements 5. Which induce the reusability of code?

a) Functions b) Statements c) classes d) Tokens 6. Which can be shared by other programs by compiling it separately and loading them together?

a) Operators b) tokens c) Functions d) Operations 7. Which statements marks the end of the function?

a) Return b) const c) continue d) break 8. …………statement transfers the control to the statement after the call statement.

a) Continue b) break c) const d) return 9. With function prototyping a………..is always used when declaring and defining a function? 10. Declaration of function is made through a function………………….

a) Variable b) prototype c) statement d) none of these 11. In a function declaration, the names of the arguments are dummy………..and therefore they are optional.

a) Keywords b) data types c) variables d) characters 12. A function can be called or invoked from other function by using its………………….

a) Data type b) name c) parameter d) reference 13. The function name may include a set of actual parameters, enclosed in parentheses separated by………

a) , (Comma) b) ; (Semicolon) c) # d) $ 14. The call statement communicates with the function through……….

a) Data types b) tokens c) arguments or parameters d) tokens 15. Which are the channels through which data flows from the call statement to the function and vice versa?

a) Arguments or parameters b) tokens c) Data types d) function name 16. In C++, functions that have arguments can be invoked in…………ways.

a) 6 b) 4 c) 2 d) 3

17. The parameters associated with call statement are called…………… a) Actual parameters b) False parameters c) Formal parameters d) function parameters

18. The parameters associated with function header are called…………… a) Formal parameters b) function parameters c) Actual parameters d) False parameters

19. In……...method, the called function creates new variables to store the value of the arguments passed to it? a) Call by reference b) Call by value c) Call by Variable d) Call by address

20. In which method, the flow of data is always from the call statement to the function definition? a) Call by value b) Call by reference c) Call by address d) Call by Variable

21. Which method copies the values of actual parameters into the formal parameters? a) Call by reference b) Call by value c) Call by Variable d) Call by address

22. In which method there any change made in formal parameter is not reflected back to the actual parameter? a) Call by Value b) Call by reference c) Call by void d) Call by variables

CHAPTER-4: Functions

Page 52: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

52 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

23. In which method, the called function arguments formal parameters-become alias to the actual parameters in the calling function? a) Call by reference b) Call by value c) Call by Variable d) Call by address

24. In which method when the function is working with its own arguments, it is actually working on the original data? a) Call by value b) Call by reference c) Call by address d) Call by Variable

25. In…method there any change made in formal parameter is reflected back to the actual parameter. a) Call by reference b) Call by Value c) Call by void d) Call by address

26. The actual parameters can be passed in the form of………to the formal parameters which are of vale type. a) Constants or variables b) variables or expressions c) Constants or expressions d) Constants or variables or expressions

27. The actual parameters can be passed only as………….to the formal parameters of reference type. a) Constants b) Variables c) expressions d) characters

28. In C++, one can assign default values to the…………….parameters of a function prototype. a) formal b) actual c) false d) dummy

29. …………….facilities the function call statement with partial or no arguments. a) Variables b) default arguments c) constants d) formal parameters

30. The default values can be included in the function prototype from…………….. a) beginning b) between c) right to left d) anywhere

31. The ASCII value for ‘a’ is…………. a) 65 b) 97 c) 96 d) 66

32. The actual parameters are matched with formal parameters on the basis of………….. a) Precedence b) one-to-one correspondence c) place value d) data type

33. The functions that return no value is declared as…………. a) int b) float c) char d) void

34. The data type of a function is treated as……………..if no data type is explicitly mentioned. a) int b) float c) char d) double

35. By default the return value of a function in C++ is of type…………. a) int b) float c) char d) void

36. In which following function prototype is correct? a) int add( int a, int b) b) float average(a,b) c) int fun(int a=1,int b, float pi) d) int display(int a=5, int b)

37. The return type of function prototype fact (float a, char c, double d); a) int b) float c) char d) double

38. The return type of the function prototype float power(float, int); a) int b) float c) char d) double

39. A function returning a reference can appear on the …………of an assignment. a) left-hand side b) right-hand side c) middle d) Both A&B

40. The formal parameters for a reference function should always be of……………parameter type. a) value b) reference c) constant d) character

41. The compiler maintains overheads like………that would save certain special instructions pertaining to function call, return and its arguments. a) Stacks b) storage class c) tokens d) const

42. Which reduces the speed of program? a) functions b) variables c) constants d) Stacks

Page 53: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

53 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

43. Which functions execute faster but requires more memory space? a) void main( ) b) cinline c) outline d) inline

44. …………..looks like a normal function in the source file but inserts the function’s code directly into the calling program. a) return b) inline c) continue d) break

45. …………..keyword is just a request to the compiler. a) auto b) break c) inline d) static

46. The keyword …………….is used to make the function as inline. a) return b) inline c) continue d) break

47. Which refers to the accessibility of a variable? a) Argument b) Range c) identifier d) Scope

48. There are……………..types of scopes in variables in C++. a) 4 b) 3 c) 5 d) 2

49. A………………variable is defined within a block. a) File b) Class c) Local d) function

50. A…………variable cannot be accessed from outside the block of its declaration. a) File b) Local c) Class d) Function

51. A block code begins and ends with………….. a) { } b) ( ) c) [ ] d) /…../

52. Which variable is defined with in a block? a) Local b) file c) class d) function

53. ……….variables exist only while the block of code in which they are declared is executing? a) File b) Local c) Class d) Function

54. A………..variable is created upon entry into block and destroyed upon exit. a) Class b) Class c) Local d) File

55. The scope of which variables is extended to the function block, and all sub block therein? a) Local b) file c) class d) function

56. A variable declared above all blocks and functions has the scope of a………………… a) File b) Local c) Class d) Function

57. The scope of a…………scope variable is the life time of a program? a) Local b) file c) class d) function

58. The scope resolution operator is…………… a) & b) * c) : : d) %

59. Function parameters can also be called as………….. a) Operators b) arguments c) symbols d) None of these

60. Functions should be declared………………..they are used. a) After b) before c) at the end d) None of these

61. ………….is used to reduce the size of program? a) Tokens b) Inheritance c) Class d) Function

62. Which of the following about function is false? a) Functions are executable segments in a program b) Functions reduce the size of program c) Functions induce reusability of code d) Functions provide data security

63. Which amongst the following can only be passed to formal parameters of reference type in C++? a) Values b) variables c) Constants d) Expressions

Page 54: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

54 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

64. Which of the following is NOT true, related to functions? a) The actual parameters can be passed in the form of constants to the formal parameters of value type. b) The actual parameters can be passed only as variable to formal parameters of reference type. c) The default value in the formal parameters can be given in the form of variable initialization. d) The default value for an argument can be given in between the argument list.

65. if(x<y) { int a; a++; } In the above code, the scope of the variable ‘a’? a) File b) Local c) Class d) Function

66. Which one of the following scope variable’s lifetime is the lifetime of a program? a) Local b) Class c) Function d) File

67. Which is used to help the compiler to check the data requirements of the function? a) Header files b) Function prototype c) Function definition d) Function calling

68. In C++ what can be assigned to the formal parameters of a function prototype? a) Default values b) program c) Default arguments d) values

69. Find the output the program? #include<iostream.h>

void main( )

{

int n1=10,n2=&n1;

n2++;

cout<<n1;

}

a) 10 b) 11 c) 12 d) 13 70. Which of the following is a valid function prototype?

a) int add( int a, b); b) float average(a,b); c) int fun(int a,int b, float pi=3.14); d) int display(int a=5, int b);

Page 55: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

55 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

1. ………is a derived data type in C++.

a) Number b) Array c) float d) single precision 2. Which can hold several values of type?

a) Variables b) Float c) Array d) Class 3. In order to handle large data with ease,……………are used.

a) Array b) Functions c) expressions d) pointer 4. Which is a collection of variables of the same data type that are referenced by a common name?

a) Expression b) pointer c) variable d) Array 5. Arrays are of…………..types.

a) 3 b) 4 c) 2 d) 5 6. Which array comprising of finite homogeneous elements?

a) Three dimensional b) One dimensional c) two dimensional d) array dimensional 7. Which array comprising of elements each of which is itself one-dimensional array?

a) Three dimensional b) One dimensional c) Two dimensional d) array dimensional 8. The size of array should always be………….

a) Positive b) negative c) float d) hexa decimal 9. Memory required for one integer is………….bytes.

a) 4 b) 6 c) 2 d) 1 10. The array subscripts always commences from ………………

a) 1 b) 0 c) -1 d) 2 11. cin>>number[4] reads the …………..element of the array.

a) Third b) fifth c) fourth d) first 12. Cin>>num[3] reads the……..element of the array.

a) third b) fifth c) fourth d) first 13. The process of rearranging the data in a given array either in ascending or descending order is called.

a) Searching b) merging c) sorting d) inserting 14. Which are otherwise called as literals?

a) Numbers b) characters c) Strings d) float 15. A character array used as string should be terminated with a…………

a) \p b) \0 c) \t d) \c 16. To treat spaces as part of string literal, one has to use……….function?

a) gets( ) or getline( ) b) cin c) gets( ) or getch( ) d) None of these 17. gets( ) function is defined in the header file……………

a) istream.h b) ostream.h c) stdio.h d) gets( ) 18. getline( ) is a member function of………….

a) ostream.h b) stdio.h c) math.h d) istream.h 19. There are………….methods to display the contents of string?

a) 1 b) 2 c) 3 d) 4 20. Which is a member function of standard of standard output stream?

a) gets( ) b) cin c) write( ) d) scanf 21. How many parameters are required for write( ) function? a) 2 b) 3 c) 5 d) 4

CHAPTER-5: Arrays

Page 56: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

56 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

22. In which header file string manipulators are defined? a) istream.h b) ostream.h c) stdio.h d) string.h( )

23. Which function returns the number of characters stored in the array? a) strcpy( ) b) strcmp( ) c) strlen( ) d) strcat( )

24. Which functions copies source string to target string? a) strcpy( ) b) strcmp( ) c) strlen( ) d) strcat( )

25. Which functions compares the two given strings? a) strcpy( ) b) strcmp( ) c) strlen( ) d) strcat( )

26. In which array the elements are stored in Sequential memory blocks? a) Three dimensional b) One dimensional c) Two dimensional d) array dimensional

27. What is the size of array int b[2][4]? a) 8 b) 16 c) 32 d) 64

28. The number of elements of the array int num[10][10]; is………… a) 110 b) 20 c) 10 d) 100

29. How many bytes need for this array char[25];………….. a) 25 b) 50 c) 100 d) 75

30. How many elements will be stored in the array int x[ ]={0,1,1,2,3,4,5}? a) 5 b) 6 c) 7 d) 8

31. Write ( ) is member function of………… a) istream.h b) conio.h c) ostream.h d) math.h

32. How many bytes need for this array float num[5][4]………….. a) 40 b) 80 c) 20 d) 21

33. In the array int a[2][4]; the first row and second column is……… a) a[1][2] b) a[2][1] c) a[0][1] d) a[1][0]

34. How many elements are available in this array int a[‘A’]; a) 66 b) 65 c) 68 d) 69

35. Which are treated as single dimensional array of characters? a) Strings b) numbers c) float d) expression

36. The instance……………….treats white spaces or carriage return as terminator for string. a)cin b) gets( ) c) getline( ) d) cout

37. The number of elements are stored of the array int sales[2][2] is……… a) 2 b) 8 c) 6 d) 4

38. What is the size of array float num[4][6]? a) 24 b) 96 c) 48 d) 102

39. How many elements will be stored in the array int x[ ]={1,2,3,3,4,4,55} a)5 b) 9 c) 7 d) 8

40. Array parameters by default behave like a …………parameter? a) value type b) array type c) reference type d) float type

41. A set of mn numbers arranged in the form of rectangular array of m rows and n columns is called... a) Matrix b) functions c) array d) pointer

42. ………….can be represented through 2-D arrays. a) array b) pointer c) matrix d) functions

43. An array of strings is a…………………dimensional character array? a) Three b) Two c) Four d) One

44. In 2-D array declaration the first subscript represents the number of………… a) columns b) rows c) elements d) pointers

Page 57: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

57 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

45. In 2D array declarations the second subscript represents the number of……….. a) Columns b) rows c) elements d) pointer

46. Attaching the…………..character to each string literal is optional? a) Void b) null c) row d) column

47. An integer array with indices from 0 to 4, all having value 1 may be declared and initialized as…. a) int a[4]={1}; b) int a[4]={1,1,1,1}; c) int a[5]={1,1,1,1,1} d) int a[ ]={ }

48. The function strcpy(s1,s2)……….. a) Copies s1 to s2 b) copies s2 to s1 c) appends s1 to s2 d) appends s2 to s1

49. Which of the following is a 2-Dimensional character array? a) Array of Strings b) Matrix c) Literals d) Strings

50. Which of the following is an invalid array declaration? a) int array[100]; b) int array[ ]; c) int array[i]; d) const int i=10;int array[i];

51. Determines the number of elements in the following declaration int a[10][5]; a) 22 b) 50 c) 12 d) 120

52. Arrays in C++belong to which of the following data type? a) User defined b) Built in c) Derived d) Basic

53. Strings are otherwise called? a) Names b) Literals c) Constants d) Variables

54. Memory allotted for int num[4][4]; is……….. a) 8 b) 16 c) 32 d) 64

55. Short fine[‘A’][‘E]; In this array……….. rows and …………..columns are declared. a) 67,69 b) 65,69 c) 97,65 d) 64,65

56. In the array, int sales[2][4]; the Second row and second column is…………. a) sales[1][2] b) sales[2][1] c) sales[0][1] d) sales[1][1]

Page 58: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

58 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

1. The most important of C++ is the………..

a) Variable b) array c) Class d) pointer 2. For C++, Bjarne Stroustrup initially gave the name………..

a) C b) C++ c) C with classes d) Java Classes 3. A …………is a way of creating and implementing a user defined data type.

a) Arrays b) Class c) Function d) Pointer 4. Which provide a method for packing and implementing a user defined data types?

a) Variable b) array c) Class d) pointer 5. The functions are also called as………………..

a) Arrays b) methods c) arrays d) Methods 6. ………..is a way to bind the data and its associated functions together.

a) Pointers b) methods c) arrays d) Class 7. A class specification has ………..parts.

a) 4 b) 3 c) 2 d) 5 8. Which keyword specifications user defined data type class name?

a) Private b) Class c)student d)static 9. The body of a class is enclosed within………………..

a) ( ) b) < > c) { } d) [ ] 10. The body of a class is terminated by a…………………..

a) : b) , c) ( ) d) ; 11. The class body contains the declarations of…………..and…………..

a) Functions, arrays b) Variables, Functions c) Functions, Pointers d) pointers, Variables 12. The class body has……………..access specifiers.

a) 2 b) 4 c) 3 d) 5 13. Which of the following is not a valid access specifiers?

a) Private b) Class c) protected d) public 14. Specifying…………..visibility label is optional.

a) Public b) private c) protected d) class 15. By default the members will be treated as………if a visibility label is not mentioned.

a) Class b) protected c) public d) private 16. The members that have been declared as………….can be accessed only from within the class.

a) private b) auto c) public d) Static 17. The members that have been declared as…………….can be accessed from within the class, and the

members of the inherited class. a) private b) public c) auto d) protected

18. The members that have been declared as………….can be accessed from outside the class also. a) Public b) private c) protected d) public,private

19. The binding of data and functions together into a single entity is referred to as…….. a) Encapsulation b) polymorphism c) inheritance d) Data hiding

20. Instruments allowing only selected access of components to objects and to members of other classes is called as…………….. a) Encapsulation b) Data processing c) Data hiding d) Data abstraction

21. Data abstraction is achieved through…………… a) Encapsulation b) Data hiding c) Data riding d) Sorting

CHAPTER-6: Classes and Objects

Page 59: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

59 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

22. How many copies of the static member variable is created? a) 4 b) 3 c) 2 d) 1

23. Class simple { int a,b, float c; }s1; The number of bytes occupied by s1 is……… a) 4 b) 8 c) 10 d) 12

24. A member function can call another function directly without using dot operator is called as……. a) Inline function b) Nesting of member function c) friend function d) recursive

25. When a member function is defined within the class, it behaves like………….function? a) friend b) inline c) outline d) online

26. In C++, objects of a class are also called as………. a) Instance b) tag c) constants d) methods

27. Which is the key feature of the object oriented programming? a) Class b) Data hiding c)polymorphism d) pointers

28. Class comprises of……………..members. a) 5 b) 4 c) 3 d)2

29. Which are the data variables that represents the features or properties of a class? a) Data Members b) Members Function c) Arrays d) Pointers

30. Which are the functions that perform specific tasks in a class? a) Members Function b) Arrays c) Pointers d) Data Members

31. Data members are also called as…………….. a) Member functions b) pointers c) Attributes d) Methods

32. Member functions are also called as…………. a) Member functions b) Methods c) Pointers d) Attributes

33. Classes include special member functions called as…………….and……………. a) Constructors, Destructors b) Constructors, Pointers c) Constructors, Specifiers d) Methods, Pointers

34. In C++ the class variables are known as……………… a) Methods b) Objects c) tags d) functions

35. The members of a class are accessed using the…………operator a) Comma , b) semicolon : c) dot . d) colon :

36. Which operator is used to define function outside a class? a) : b) : c) :: d) ?:

37. Which one of the following operator is called as scope resolution operator in C++? a): b) :: c) . d) :?

38. The static member variable is initialized to………………. a) 0 b) 1 c) true d) false

39. Which statements can be read as ‘stud’ is an object of the class ‘student’? a) stud student; b) student s; c) student stud; d)class student (stud);

40. The variable that initialized only when the first objet of the class is created is……… a) Static b) Register c) Auto d) Extern

41. The class access specifier used to access friend function is…………. a) Private b) protected c) public d) pointer

Page 60: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

60 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

42. Which of the following statements is NOT true? a) Member function a can be of static type. b) The return type of a member function cannot be object data type. c) A non-member function cannot access the private data of a class. d) Several different classes can use the same function name.

43. Class comprises of……………. a) Data Members b) Members Function c) Both A&B d) Pointers

44. Private access specifier is accessible by special function called………… a) Void b) friend c) inline d) None of these

45. Class student { int x,y, float z; }p[6]; In the above snippet, how many object are created? a) 5 b) 6 c) 7 d) 1

46. A class belongs to which of the following data type? a) User defined b) Built in c) Derived d) Basic

47. The variable shared by all the objects of a class has the data type…………… a) Static b) auto c) extern d) private

48. Which is the default access specifier in the class? a) private b) public c) protected d) none

#include<iostream.h>

class item

{

int code,quantity;

float price;

void getdata( );

protected:

void compute( );

public:

float tax;

void putdata( );

};

void main( )

{

item i;

} 49. Memory allocation for instance “i” is………….

a)12 bytes b) 10 bytes c) 8 bytes d) 16 bytes 50. Public data member in the above class definition is……………

a) price b) code c) tax d) quantity 51. Method that can be accessed by object is……………

a) compute( ) b) getdata( ) c) putdata( ) d) All of these 52. The initial value to a static member variable is done …………… of the class?

a) Inside b) Outside c) Both A&B d) None of these

Page 61: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

61 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

53. Which data member variable to initial value of the outside of the class? a) Static b) auto c) extern d) private

54. Class name is also called……………….. a) Function b) member c) method d) tag

55. The members of the class are accessed by using a/an………………. a) Increment operator c) Decrement operator b) Scope resolution operator d) Dot operator

56. Which has scope or visibility within the class but its lifetime is the life time of the program? a) Static b) auto c) extern d) private

57. Which of the following is true? a) Member functions can be defined outside the class also b) Member function cannot be defined outside the class c) All member functions must have same name d) A class cannot have more than three member functions

58. When object is created, no separate space is allocated for………….. a) Data Members b) Objects c) Member functions d) Static members

Page 62: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

62 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

1. The word polymorphism means……………..

a) Many variables b) many pointers c) many functions d) many forms 2. In how many ways polymorphism is achieved in C++?

a) 3 b) 2 c) 4 d) 5 3. The term…………….. means a name having two or more distinct meaning.

a) Inheritance b) Overloading c) Constructor d) Encapsulation 4. Which refers to a function having more than one distinct meaning?

a) Overload function b) member function c) object function d) separate function 5. ………………is one of the facts of C++ that supports objet oriented programming?

a) Member function b) Function overloading c) single function d) Method function 6. The ability of the function to process the message or data in more than one form is called as………….

a) Single function b) Method function c) Member function d) Function overloading 7. The compiler adopts __________ strategy in function overloading.

a) Best match b) any match c) Best object d)ascending order 8. In integral promotions double data type can be converted to ________

a) int or char b) int or float c) char or float d) char or string 9. The _________ arguments of overloaded functions are not considered by the C++ compiler as part of the

parameter list. a) Default b) actual c) formal d) distinct

10. Which overloading refers to giving additional to the normal C++ operators? a) Single function b) Operator overloading c) Member function d) Function overloading

11. The functionality of ‘+’ operator can be extended to strings through _______overloading. a) Operator b) function c) constructor d) object

12. Which function is used to concatenate strings? a) ) ) ) strcat( ) b) strlen( ) c) strcmp( ) d) strcpy( )

13. Operator functions must be……………….functions. a) member b) friend c) Constructor d) ) ) ) member or friend

14. Declare the operator function operator ( ) in the _______ part of the class. a) Private b) protected c) public d) main( )

15. The mechanism of giving special meaning to an operator is called as ___________ a)Function overloading b) constructor overloading c) object overloading d) operator overloading

16. The overloaded operator must have at least………..operand of user defined data type? a) ) ) ) One b) Two c) Three d) Four

17. When ________ operators are overloaded, the left hand object must be an object of the relevant class. a) Unary b) binary c) ternary d) logical

18. How many explicit arguments is are taken by Binary Operators overloaded through a member function? a) ) ) ) One b) Two c) Three d) Four

19. Which operators overloaded through a member function take one explicit argument? a) Unary b) binary c) ternary d) logical

20. Overloaded operators behave in the same way as the…………..operators in terms of their operands? a) User defined b) binary c) Basic d) logical

CHAPTER-7: Polymorphism

Page 63: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

63 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

Read the following C++ program carefully and answer questions from 21 to 23. # include <iostream.h> void operator –( ) class negative { { int i; i= -i; Public: }; void accept( ) void main( ) { cin >>i; } { negative n1, n2; void display ( ) n2.accept( ); { cout <<i; } -n2; n2.display( ); } 21. Identify the operator that is overloaded.

a) = b) –(unary) c) - (Binary) d) Negative 22. The prototype of the overloaded member function is _________

a) negative operator– ( ) b) void operator minus c) void operator – ( ) d) void operator – (negative)

23. Which of the following statements i.nvokes the overloaded member function? a) negative n1,n2; b) – n2( ); c) n2+; d) –n2;

24. Polymorphism is achieved in C++ through___________ a) Encapsulation b) Inheritance c) Overloading d) function

25. ___________ is an invalid function prototype in overloading. a) void fun(int x); void fun( int y); b) void fun(int x, int y); void fun(int x, float y); c) int fun(int x); void fun(float x); d) void fun(char x); void fun(char x, int y);

26. ________ is a membership operator. a) . b) :: c) & d) !

27. In operator overloading the operator functions must be defined as ________ a) Member function b) friend function c) either (a) or (b) d) neither (a) nor (b)

28. The overloaded operator must have at least one operand of_______ a) Built-in type b) User defined type c) Array d) Derived

29. The overloaded function definitions are permitted for which of the following data types? a) Built in b)User defined c) Derived d) Overloading

30. ________ is not true related to function overloading. a) Each overloaded function must differ by the number of its formal parameters b) The return type of overloaded functions may be the same data type c) The default arguments are considered by the C++ compiler as part if parameter list d) Do not use the same function name for two unrelated functions

31. By integral promotions, int data type can be converted into _______data type. a) Char b) double c) float d) All of these

32. In polymorphism, the compiler adopts which strategy to match function call statement? a) Best match b) any match c) Best object d)ascending order

33. Which of the operators cannot be overload? a) :: b) . c) ?: d) All of these

34. _______operators can be overloaded. a) :: b) . c) ?: d) +

Page 64: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

64 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

35. The parameter list in function overloading must differ by _______ a) Number of arguments b) Function name c) function size d) number of functions

36. _______________ is false in case of operator overloading. a) Only existing operators can be overloaded b) The basic definition of an operator can be replaced c) The overloaded operator must have at least one operand of user defined type. d) Binary operators overloaded through member function take one explicit argument.

37. In C++ , each overloaded function must differ either by the number of ___ a) Function name b) actual parameter c) default parameter d) formal parameter

Page 65: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

65 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

1. Which special function gets executed, when an instance of a class comes to scope………...gets executed.

a) Constructor b) Destructor c) Overloading d) Member function 2. Which special function gets executed, When a class object goes out of scope……………..gets executed.

a) Destructor b) Constructor c) Member function d) Member function 3. Which function initializes the class object?

a) Constructor b) Destructor c) Overloading d) Variables 4. Which function name same name as the class tag?

a) Constructor b) Destructor c) Both A&B d) Constant 5. Which function returns nothing?

a) Constructor b) Destructor c) Both A&B d) Constant 6. Which function is not associated with any data type?

a) Constructor b) Destructor c) Both A&B d) Constant 7. When the program is executed……….is automatically executed when the class object is created?

a) Destructor b) Constructor c) Member function Overloading d) Member function 8. Which is executed at the time of program termination?

a) Constructor b) Destructor c) Overloading d) Member function 9. Which function allocates memory space to an object?

a) Destructor b) Constructor c) Member function d) Overloading 10. Which functions removes the memory space of an object with was allocated by the constructor at the time

of creating a object? a) Constructor b) Destructor c) Overloading d) Member function

11. The constructor add(add&a) is……….. a) Default Constructor b) Parameter Constructor c) Overloading d) Copy constructor

12. Which constructor is executed when an object is passed to any one of the member functions? a) Overloading b) Copy constructor c) Default Constructor d) Parameterized Constructor

13. When a member function returns an object which constructor is executed? a) Default Constructor b) Parameterized Constructor c) Overloading d) Copy constructor

14. Which constructor is executed when an object is passed by reference to constructor? a) Overloading b) Copy constructor c) Default Constructor d) Parameter Constructor

15. The constructor without parameter is called as………………. a) Default Constructor b) Parameterized Constructor c) Overloading d) Copy constructor

16. A constructors with parameters is called as………… a) Default Constructor b) Parameterized Constructor c) Overloading d) Copy constructor

17. Which constructors are referred to compiler generated constructors? a) Default Constructor b) Parameterized Constructor c) Overloading d) Copy constructor

18. Constructor has the same name as the……………….tag. a) Object b) function c) Class d) Instance

19. Destructor has the same name as the……………….tag. a) Class b) Instance c) Object d) function

20. Constructor and destructor return………………. a) 0 b) 1 c) 2 d) Nothing

21. Constructors and destructors are not associated with any……………… a) Function b) Data type c) Object d) None of these

CHAPTER-8: Constructor and Destructor

Page 66: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

66 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

22. The………………function initialize the class object. a) Constructor b) Destructor c) Overloading d) None of these

23. The memory space is allocated to an object using………………. a) Constructor b) Destructor c) Overloading d) None of these

24. ………………overloading can be applied for constructors. a) Operator b) Function c) Data d) None of these

25. The constructor without any parameter is called as ………………constructor. a) Initial b) Instance c) Default d) None of these

26. The default constructors are referred to………………generated constructors. a) System b) Instance c) Linker d) Assembler

27. The ………………cannot be overloaded. a) Constructor b) Destructor c) Operator d) functions

28. The………………function can be overloaded. a) Constructor b) Destructor c) Data d) None of these

29. The------is executed automatically when the control reaches the ends of class scope. a) Constructor b) Destructor c) Overloading d) copy constructor

30. The destructors prefixed by the………………character. a) - b) ~ c) + d) =

31. The……………… can have parameter list. a) Constructor b) Destructor c) Overloading d) None of these

32. Which of the following cannot have parameter list? a) Constructor b) Destructor c) Overloading d) None of these

33. A class can have…………….destructors only? a) One b) Two c) Three d) multiple

34. Which of the following is true? a) Constructor can have parameter list b) Destructor can have parameter list

c) Constructors returns the value d) Destructor returns the value 35. Which of the following is not true

a) Constructor cannot be overload b) Constructor can have parameter list c) Constructors Executes automatically d) Destructor executes automatically

36. Which of the following is true? a) Constructor have parameter list b) destructor can have parameter list c) Constructors returns the value d) Destructor returns the value

37. Which of the following is false? a) Destructor cannot be overload b) destructor cannot have parameter list c) Destructors executes automatically d) Constructor cannot be overload

38. Which of the following is true? a) Destructor returns the value b) Constructors returns the value c) Constructor can be overload d) Constructors cannot have parameter list

39. Which of the following is default constructor? a) add( ) b) add( int s1, int s2) c) add( int s1) d) add(add &a)

40. How many situations the copy constructor is executed? a) 2 b) 1 c) 3 d) 2

41. Which of the following cannot have the same as the class name? a) Constructors b) Destructors c) Overload Constructors d) Member functions

Page 67: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

67 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

42. Which of the following has no return type and cannot be overloaded? class simple

{

private:

int x;

public:

simple(int y)

{

x=y;

}

~simple( )

{

}

}; 43. What is the name of constructor?

a) ~simple( ) b) simple( ) c) private d) public 44. What type of constructor is used in this snippet?

a) Default Constructor b) Parameterized Constructor c) Overloading d) Copy constructor class simple

{

private:

int x;

public:

simple(int y)

{

x=y;

}

};

void main( )

{

Simple s(6);

} 45. How many objects are created?

a) 1 b) 5 c) 6 d) 4 46. What type of constructor is used in this snippet?

a) Default Constructor b) Parameterized Constructor c) Overloading d) Copy constructor

Page 68: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

68 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

1. ……………..is the most powerful feature of n object oriented programming language.

a) Inheritance b) Function c)Operator d) None of these 2. …………….. is the process of creating a new class based on an existing class.

a)Instantiation b) Overloading c) Overriding d) Inheritance 3. The classes which are derived from an existing class is known as……………..

a) Base b) Super c) Derived d) Parent 4. The class from which the new classes are derived is known as……………..class.

a) Derived b) Derived c) Child d) Sub 5. The classes from which other classes are derived is called……………class.

a) Base b) Super c) Derived d) Parent 6. Which class inherits all the properties of the base class?

a) Base b) Super c) Derived d) Parent 7. There ……………..class access specifiers.

a) 2 b) 3 c) 4 d) 5 8. While defining a class, the name of the derived class is to be given after the keyword…………

a) Class b) derived c) main d) sub class 9. Which symbol is used to while defining a derived class?

a) ; b) :: c) : d) , 10. Which feature is used to know as to when a member of a base class can be used by the objects of the

derived class? a) method b) accessibility c) attributes d) Object

11. Which also referred to as visibility mode? a) Destructor b) functions c) Access specifiers d) constructor

12. The default visibility mode is…………….. a) Private b) Protected c) Public d) Class

13. The access specifiers are also called as…………….. a) Visibility mode b) Private c) Protected d) None of these

14. Which members in the base class are not inherited? a) Private b) Protected c) Public d) Class

15. The …………..of the base class are not inherited? a) Functions b) Constructor c) Destructor d) Specifiers

16. The …………….. of the base class are executed first when an instance of the derived class is created. a) Constructor b) Destructor c) Overloading d) None of these

17. There are …………….. types of inheritance. a) 2 b) 3 c) 5 d) 4

18. When a derived class inherits only from one base class, it is known as…………….. inheritance. a) Multilevel b) Multiple c) Single d) Hierarchical

19. When a derived class inherits from multiple base class, it is known as……………..Inheritance. a) Single b) Hierarchical c) Multiple d) Hybrid

20. When a class is derived from a class which is a derived class itself. This is reflected to as…….inheritance. a) Multilevel b) Multiple c) Single d) Hybrid

21. …………….. form of inheritance is reflected by the transitive nature of inheritance. a) Hybrid b) Single c) Multilevel d) Hierarchical

CHAPTER-9: Inheritance

Page 69: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

69 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

22. Which are executed in the order of inherited class. a) Constructor b) Destructor c) Overloading d) None of these

23. …………….. are executed in reverse order. a) Constructor b) Destructor c) Overloading d) None of these

24. Classes used only for deriving other classes are called as…………….. class. a) Public b) Abstract c) Protected d) Inheritance

25. The objects for which classes are not declared? a) Constructor b) Destructor c) Abstract d) private

26. The constructors are executed in the order of……………..class. a) Public b) Private c) Protected d) Inheritance

27. ------------ keyword is used to define the name of the derived class. a) Public b) Private c) Protected d) Class

28. …………….. must be used between derived and base class. a) ; b) + c) : d) :: class vehicle

{

int wheels;

public:

void inputdata(int, int);

void outputdata( );

protected:

int passenger;

};

class heavy_vehicle:protected vehicle

{

int diesel_petrol;

protected:

int load;

public:

void readdata(int,int);

void writedata( );

};

class bus:private heavy_vehicle

{

char marks;

public:

void fetchdata(char);

void displaydata( );

};

29. Which is the base class of the class heavy_vehicle? a) bus b) heavy_vehicle c) vehicle d) A and B

30. The data member that can be accessed from the function display data( ) is………….. a) passenger b) load c) marks d) All of these

31. The member functions that can be accessed by an object of bus class is……………. a) inputdata, outputdata b) readdata, writedata c) fetchdata, displaydata d) All of these

32. How the derived class should be indicated? a) Class der_name : visibility mode base class_id b) Class der_name ; visibility mode base class_id c) Class der_name , visibility mode base class_id d) Class der_name ::visibility mode base class_id

Page 70: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

70 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

Read the following program and answer the questions 33 to 35 Class A { int x,y; protected: int s,t; public: int u,v; }; Class B : pubic A { };

33. The data members that inherit form class A to class B are…………. a) x,y b) s,t c) u,v d) Both B & C

34. u,v data members contain which visibility mode in class B? a) protected b) private c) public d) pointer

35. s,t data members contain which visibility mode in class B? a) private b) protected c) public d) pointer

Page 71: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

71 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

1. To reach out of benefits of IT to the common man we need at least……….technical supports. a) 4 b) 3 c) 5 d) 6

2. 85% of computer usage is…………. a) data base b) spreadsheet c) word processing d) presentation

3. Which enables data storage and management? a) Archive unit b) LCD Screen c) Picture phone d) Emotional Containers

4. Which is a scent to derive? a) LCD screens b) Robots c) Emotional Containers d) Archive units

5. Which can prevent people from acquiring bad habits? a) LCD screens b) Robots c) Personal Archives d) Emotional Containers

6. …………….store personal details like family photographs and personal treasures. a) Memo frame b) Archive units c) Robots d) Personal Archives

7. Which functions as electronic pets? a) LCD screens b) Robots c) Personal Archives d) Archive units

8. Devices with…………….features allowing to sing along with the audio coming from the original source? a) Robot b) Kara-oke c) speaker d) Personal archives

9. Which is used to easy interaction with other people through touch screen, scanner and microphone facilities? a) Archive unit b) LCD Screen c) Memo frame d) Emotional Containers

10. ………..is used to manage and study electronic books? a) Robots b) Book shelf c) Picture phone d) Archive unit

11. Which is used to draw, capture and work with multimedia elements? a) Archive unit b) LCD Screen c) Personal Creativity Tool d) Emotional Containers

12. ………………….projects the TV pictures on the ceiling or walls a) Touch Screen b) Projection TV c) Loud speaker d) Robots

13. Which is used to keep the food sufficiently warm? a) Interactive screen b) Interactive table cloth c) food analyzer d) protection cloth

14. Introduction of……………in banks reduced the time required to provide service to a user? a) Software b) long-queue c) Information Technology d) hardware

15. Expand ATM. a) Automatic Tele Medicine b) Any Time Money c) Automatic Teller Machine d) Automatic Tele Money

16. Which permits banking from the comfort of the home by using internet facilities? a) e-shopping b) ATM c) e-banking d) e-accounting

17. You can purchase any product, any brand, any quantity from anywhere through…………. a) e-banking b) e-learning c) ATM d) e-shopping

18. Give the expansion of CBT. a) Computer Based Tutorials b) Common Based Tutorials c) Company Based Tutorials d) Compact Based Tutorials

19. Which enables online educational programs leading to degrees and certifications? a) e-shopping b) e-learning c) e-banking d) e-accounting

20. …………facilities remote diagnostics. a) special Medicine b) remote Medicine c) Tele-Medicine d) None of these

CHAPTER-10: Impact of Computers on Society

Page 72: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

72 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

21. ATM is an example for……… a) e-shopping b) e-learning c) e-banking d) e-accounting

22. Which is useful in computer based education? a) e-shopping b) CBT c) e-banking d) e-accounting

23. Which became a key component in the national economy? a) Computer b) Banks c) Hardware d) Software

1. ITES stands for…………………. a) IT Enabled Services b) IT Environmental Services c) IT Evaluation Services d) IT Enabled Services

2. Which helps in improving the quality of service to the users? a) Software b) ITES c) hardware d) Computers

3. The special device that converts the speech into a letter is called……….. a) Telephone b) Gramophone c) Dicta Phone d) Micro Phone

4. …………..have ensured that many traditional services are IT enabled? a) Word processors b) Spreadsheet c) Data Bases d) All of these

5. Which of the following is not an IT enabled service? a) Reservation b) Data Digitization c) Call Center d) e-governance

6. BPO stands for…………………… a) Business Process Outstanding b) Business Process Outsourcing c) Business Process Office d) Business Process Octal

7. ………………….collected for one purpose may be useful for some other purpose also. a) Data b) application c) Programs d) Software

8. …………happening all over the globe? a) Programs b) Information Technology c) Hardware d) Software

9. …..........is sometimes defined as telephone based shared service center for specific customer activities. a) Management b) Digitization c) Call Center d) e-governance

10. Which is a category of ITES pertaining to collection, digitization and processing of data coming from various sources? a) Data Digitization b) Data Management c) e-governance d) Call Center

11. ………….is the key effective and profitable use of IT in organizations. a) Data Management b) Data Digitization c) Call Center d) e-Governance

12. Which sectors are popularly termed BFSI? a) Banking Financial Services Insurances b) Business Financial Services Insurances

c) Banking Financial Small Industries d) Business Financial Services Insurances

13. Which is a permanent legal document that formally states the result of a medical investigation? a) E-governance b) Digitization c) Data Management d) Medical Transcription

14. ……………..facilities communication and supports the insurance claims. a) Medical Transcription b) Digitization c) Call Center d) e-governance

15. There are………….steps involved in Medical Transcription. a) 4 b) 5 c) 3 d) 6

16. ………………….benefits the long time preservation of the documents. a) Management b) Digitization c) Call Center d) e-governance

CHAPTER-11: IT Enabled Services

Page 73: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

73 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

17. …………….refers to the conversion of non-digital material to digital form. a) Call center b) Medical transcription c) e-governance d) Data Digitization

18. How many steps are there in data digitization? a) 4 b) 5 c) 3 d) 6

19. Which materials may be digitized? a) Maps b) manuscripts c) moving images d) All of these

20. The two important aspects that may be ensured by the ITES provide are……… a) Data Security and customer privacy b) Customer Security and needs c) Personal security and customer satisfaction d) Better look and feel

21. Which amongst the following critical for the success of ITES? a) Cracking b) Data Security c) Computer Ethics d) All of these

22. BFSI stands for……………. a) Banking Financial Services Insurances b) Business Financial Services Insurances

c) Banking Financial Small Industries d) Business Financial Services Insurances

23. Which is used for customer related functions? a) Reservation b) Data Digitization c) Call Center d) e-governance

1. Computer ethics has its roots in the work of…………..during World War II.

a) Donn Parker b) Norbert Wiener c) Charles Babbage d) Norbert Parker 2. Who began examine unethical and illegal uses of computers by computer professionals?

a) Charles Babbage b) Donn Parker c) Norbert Parker d) Norbert Wiener 3. By the ………..a number of social and ethical consequences of information technology were becoming

public issues in American and Europe? a) 1980’s b) 1990’s c) 1960’s d) 1950’s

4. During ……………..many universities introduced formal course in computer ethics. a) 1980’s b) 1990’s c) 1960’s d) 1950’s

5. Which is the set of rules for determining moral standards or what is considered as socially acceptable behaviors? a) Computer Crime b) Ethics c) Security d) Cracking

6. There are…………types of data security. a) 4 b) 3 c) 5 d) 6

7. Which security refers to the protection of hardware, magnetic disks and other items that could be illegally accessed, stolen, damaged or destroyed? a) Data Security b) Personal Security c) Physical Security d) Anti virus security

8. Which security refers to software setups that permit only authorized access to the system? a) Physical Security b) Personnel Security c) Personal Security d) Data Security

9. Which security refers to protecting data and computer system against dishonesty or negligence of employees? a) Personnel Security b) Personal Security c) Physical Security d) Data security

10. ……………..is any illegal activity using computer software, data or access as the object, subject or instrument of the crime? a) Computer crime b) Data management c) Data Processing d) protection

CHAPTER-12: Computer Ethics

Page 74: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

74 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

11. ………..of all computer crimes happens from within the company. a) 60% b) 70% c) 80% d) 90%

12. Over……….of all crimes go unreported? a) 60% b) 70% c) 80% d) 90%

13. Making and using duplicate hardware and software is called as…………… a) Cracking b) Virus c) Piracy d) Theft of computer time

14. Which is a self-replicating program? a) Virus b) Anti Virus c) Cracking d) Software

15. Which can cause damage to the data and files stored in on your computer? a) Anti Virus b) Virus c) Piracy d) Theft of computer time

16. How many new viruses are found each day? a) 4 b) 3 c) 5 d) 6

17. How many virus programs are in existence? a) 5600 b) 5700 c) 57000 d) 56000

18. How many commandments of computer ethics written by the computer ethics Institute? a) 11 b) 10 c) 15 d) 16

19. Some other software runs on an idle computer without the knowledge of the organization is called………. a) Cracking b) Virus c) Piracy d) Theft of computer time

20. India has……………laws to prevent computer crimes. a) Crime Law b) Cyber Law c) Legal Law d) Podo act

21. Cracking come under…………………. a) Website service b) Data Security c) Computer Crime d) Transcription

22. …………….is the illegal access to the network or network system? a) Cracking b) Virus c) Piracy d) Theft of computer time

23. Which of the following is not a way of protection? a) Personnel Security b) Personal Security c) Physical Security d) Piracy

24. Which amongst the following is computer crime? a) Telemedicine b) Call center c) Cracking d) e-banking

25. The commandment of computer ethics was written at? a) Computer Ethics Institute b) AT&T Bell Laboratory c) Microsoft Corporation d) Sun Micro Systems

26. Which is computer crime? a) Theft of computer time b) Cracking c) Virus d) All of these

27. Which is computer crime? a) e-banking b) e-shopping c) e-learning d) Piracy

Page 75: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

75 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

Volume-I [Star Office]

Important Questions and Answers: 1. What is word processing?

� Star office writer is a word processor. � The term word processing refers to the activity carried out using a computer and

suitable software to create, view, edit, manipulate, transmit, store, retrieve and print documents.

2. What is text editing? Entering a new text or modifying the existing text in a document is known as text editing.

3. How to create a new document? The File����New����Text Document command can be used to open a new document.

4. How to save a document? � By selecting File����Save (or) Ctrl+S. � The Save As dialog box appeared. In this box enter the file name and click Save button.

5. How to open a document? To reopen a document that has been saved and closed, The File����Open command can be used and Ctrl+O also be used to open a document.

6. How to close a document? After saving the document can be closed using File����Close command (or) Alt+F4 keys.

7. How will you correct the mistakes? 1. All the characters, which are typed, appear on the screen. If a mistake is identified it can be

corrected either using the Backspace key or Delete key. 2. Backspace key deletes the characters to the left of the insertion point. 3. Delete key deletes the characters to the right of the insertion point.

8. Write down some other word processing packages? � MS-Word � Lotus AmiPro � Word Perfect � Word Star � Word Pro � Star Office Writer

9. How do you work between multiple documents? (Or) How can you switch between multiple documents?

In two ways we can switch between multiple documents. � Click on the Window menu option and select the file from the list of documents

displayed. � Click on the document button visible on the taskbar.

These documents can be closed one by one using the File����Close Command.

CHAPTER 1: AN INTRODUCTION TO STAR OFFICE

Page 76: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

76 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

10. What are the difference between copying text and moving text?

11. How will you Move the text in Star Office Writer? 1. The text to be move is selected. 2. Edit����Cut is selected. 3. The insertion point is moved to the place where the text is to be pasted. 4. Edit����Paste is selected. 5. The following keyboard shortcuts can be used to move the text.

12. How will you Copy the text in Star Office Writer? 1. The text to be copied is selected. 2. Edit����Copy is selected. 3. The insertion point is moved to the place text is to be pasted. 4. Edit����Paste is selected. 5. The following keyboard shortcuts can be used to copy the text.

13. How will you select the text with keyboard? � Insertion point is moved to the start of the text to be selected. � The Shift key is pressed down and the movement keys are used to highlight the required

text. � When the shift key is released, the text is selected.

14. How will you select the text with mouse? � Insertion point is moved to the start of the text to be selected. � The left mouse button should be clicked, held down and dragged across the text to be

selected. � When the intended text is selected, the mouse button should be released. � To unselect the wrongly selected text a click should be made outside the selected text

15. How would you switch over from insert mode to type over mode? � The user can toggle between type over mode and the insert mode by using Insert key. � The status bar gives the information about the current mode.

Extra Questions and Answers: 16. What is Star Office?

� Star Office is an application that is designed to work on different operating systems. � Star Office is a full-featured office productivity suite with powerful stand alone application

that can also open, edit and save Microsoft office documents. � It is developed by Sun Micro Systems.

Copying Text Moving Text 1. When text is copied, the copied text

remains both in source and destination. 2. The key is used to copy and paste

Ctrl+C and Ctrl+V

1. When text is moved, the cutted text only in the destination place.

2. The key is to cut and paste Ctrl+X and Ctrl+V

Ctrl+X����To Cut

Ctrl+V���� To Paste

Ctrl+C����To Copy

Ctrl+V���� To Paste

Page 77: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

77 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

17. What are the Star Office applications? 1. Create text document using Star Office Writer. 2. Create spreadsheet using Star Office Calc. 3. Create Database using Star Office Base. 4. Create Presentation Star Office Impress. 5. Draw using Star Office Draw.

18. Difference Between Backspace and delete keys? Backspace Delete

Backspace key deletes the characters to the left of the insertion point.

Delete key deletes the characters to the right of the insertion point.

19. When the enter key should be pressed? � The enter key should be pressed at the end of a paragraph. � When a blank line is to be inserted. When we want short paragraph.

20. Define Insertion point? � As the characters are typed they are appear on the screen and the Flashing vertical bar

called the insertion point moves to the right. � This insertion point always indicates where the new text will appear.

21. What are the scrolling procedures to be followed in Star office writer? The scrolling procedure is as follows: � To Scroll left and right, the left and right arrow respectively should be clicked. � To scroll up and down, the up and down arrow respectively should be clicked. � To scroll a relative distance in the document the scroll box should be drawn up or down. � If there are several pages in the document the user can know the current page number by

looking at the pop-up page number that appears next to the scroll bar. 22. What are the difference between insert mode and type over mode?

23. What are the various activities you can do in text editing? Copy, cut, paste, find and Replace are some of the commonly used editing functions.

24. What is Document? � A document may contain text, tables, graphs, charts, equations, pictures and drawings. � It is also called as file.

Important Questions and Answers 1. What is text formatting?

� A text without any special formatting can have a monotonous appearance. � To outline text, to highlight individual words, quotations, or references, or to separate

certain parts of the text, various types of formatting can be applied.

Insert Mode Type Over Mode In Insert Mode the new text will be inserted and the existing text would move to the right while typing a new text.

In Type over mode, if the text existing to the right of insertion point disappears while typing a new text.

CHAPTER-2: TEXT FORMATTING

Page 78: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

78 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

2. What is meant by text highlighting? � Highlighting can be used to call attention to key ideas or points in a document. � Highlighting is used to review or find the key points in the document. � The color to be used for highlighting.

3. What is meant by indenting text in Star Office Writer? � Indenting the text means the paragraph or quotations that are set apart from the main

document text for more readability. � Visual clue helps the reader to see how the document is divided into paragraphs. � One may want to use a special kind of indent called a hanging indent for numbered list.

4. How would you create the Bullet list in Star Office Writer? � Select the text that to which bullets are to be added. � Click on the Bullets Icon from the formatting toolbar, Star office writer

creates a bulleted list. � Star office writer will not add bullets for each line and any blanks lines within the

selection. 5. How would you create the numbered list in Star Office Writer?

� Select the text to be numbered.

� Click icon to create a numbered list. � The star office writer will number each paragraph. Star office writer will not add

numbers for each line and any blanks lines within the selection. 6. How would you remove the bullets and numbered lists?

� To remove bullets from a list, the list selected and the Bullets button is clicked again. � To remove number for a list, select the list and click the Numbering Button.

7. What are the difference line spacing options in Star office writer? There are seven types of line spacing options available in star office writer. They are

1. Single 2. 1.5 lines 3. Double 4. Proportional 5. At least 6. Leading 7. Fixed

Single Space is default line spacing in Star Office Writer document. 8. What are the various types of paragraph alignment?

There are 4 types of paragraph alignment in writer. They are � Left Alignment � Ctrl+L � Right Alignment � Ctrl+R � Center Alignment � Ctrl+E � Justified � Ctrl+J � Left alignment is a default paragraph alignment.

Page 79: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

79 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

9. How to modify the line spacing? 1. Select the paragraph(s) that needs to be changed. 2. Select Format����Paragraph. 3. If necessary, click Indents & Spacing tab. 4. Click on the Line Spacing drop-down list box and select the required line spacing optin. 5. Click the OK button.

10. Define hanging indent? � The first line option in paragraph dialog box can be used to indent the line of the paragraph. � Using spin arrows, if positive value is specified the first line will be indented. � If a negative value is specified then the result will be in a hanging indent that is the first line

will hang outside the paragraph. � It is used for numbered list.

11. What is the use of Bullet and numbered list? � Bullets and numbers are used to list the important points and messages. � A bullet precedes each item in the list and the text is indented. � Numbered list work well for directions or other point’s one want to present in sequence.

Extra Questions and Answers: 12. What are the difference between soft formatting and hard formatting?

13. What are the difference between hard return and soft return? Hard return Soft Return

A hard return is inserted every line when enter key is pressed.

Soft returns are inserted as line breaks by star office writer and are adjusted when text is added or deleted.

14. What are the help systems available in Star Office? Four types of help systems available in Star Office. 1. Online Help 2. Help Agent 3. Help Tips 4. Extended help tips.

15. Write note on help agent (or) what is help Agent? � The help agent is an animated figure. � It is used to open help topic for the given task. � It automatically appears when we perform complex task. � The content of the help agent window changes depending on what is being done in the main

window. 16. What are the formatting changes that can be made with respect to the fonts?

Changing the text bold, italic, underline and the font size, color are the commonly used formatting changes.

Hard Formatting Soft Formatting Formatting such as bold or italic defining the font type and font size can be printed in the form of hard copy is called hard formatting.

Formatting such as bold or italic defining the font type and font size can be seen on the screen is called soft formatting.

Page 80: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

80 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

17. What is font? � A font is a set of characters and numbers in a certain style. � Each font looks different from other fonts. � Times New Roman font look professional and suited for business documents. � Fajita font is a decorative font. It is used for printing invitation. � Symbol and Windings fonts are actually set of symbols. This font is used to insert special

characters in the document. 18. How will you change font name to selected text?(Or) Write the method of changing font

name in writer? � Click the down arrow in the font combo box of font tab in character dialog box. � Use Format����Character to open character dialog box. � From the list of available fonts, click the required one and click OK button. � Now the text changes to the selected font.

19. How will you change the font size to selected text? (Or) Write the method of changing the size in writer? � Click the down arrow in the Size combo box of font tab in character dialog box. � Use Format����Character to open character dialog box. � From the list of available font size, click the required one and click OK button. � Now the text changes to the selected font size.

20. How will you change the font Color to selected text? (Or) Write the method of changing the Color in writer? � To use the different text color, select the text and click the arrow in the font color icon. � A colour palette is displayed. From colour palette the required colour can be selected

click OK button. � Now the text changes the to the selected font colour. � Alternatively, select the text and click on the font, color icon, to apply the current of the

font colour.

Important Questions and Answers 1. What is auto correct option?

� Star Office Writer will automatically correct some spelling mistakes. Star Office Writer recognizes some common misspellings and typographical mistakes and makes the replacement automatically.

� For example, if a word is typed ‘teh’ the star office writer automatically replaces this with the correct word ‘the’ .

2. What are the uses of Auto Correct option? Auto correct option is very useful for correcting the spelling of the commonly misspelled words.

CHAPTER-3: CORRECTING SPELLING MISTAKES

Page 81: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

81 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

3. What are ways to correct the spelling mistakes? � Spelling mistakes can be corrected in two ways. � Backspace key is pressed to delete a misspelled word and the word is retyped. � If the right spelling is not known, star office writer can help user with some choices. The

misspelled word is right clicked. A pop-up menu appears on the screen. If the correct spelling is shown, a click is made on that word. Star office writer makes the replacement.

Extra Questions and Answers 4. How does Star Office Writer checking spelling while typing?

� Star Office Writer has an automatic spell check feature that can check for possible spelling mistakes even as the document is being typed.

� This feature can be turned ON or OFF by clicking on the Auto Spell Check icon. � When Auto Spell Check feature is ON, star office writer compares each word typed the

words in the dictionary and underlines words that do not match with a squiggly red line. � These red lines can ignored and the typing work may be obtained.

5. When the star office writer can identify the spelling mistakes? � Star Office Writer can identify the spelling mistakes in two ways. 1. Checking spelling while typing. 2. Checking the spelling after the document is typed.

6. Where can we see the misspelled words and alternative spellings in spell check dialog box?

� Not in dictionary text area displays the misspelled words. � Suggestions list displays any alternative spellings.

7. How would you add a word in Auto correct list of the star office writer? In spell check dialog box Add button is clicked to add a word in the Auto Correct list of the star office writer.

8. What are the steps used to spell check a documents? (Or) How will you get spell check dialog box? The following steps are used to spell check a document. � Tools����Spelling����Check commands is selected. � Icon is clicked. � To check a part of the document only that portions is selected. � F7 key may also be pressed to select the spelling command.

9. What is the use Automatic Spell Check? Automatic spell check feature that can for possible spelling mistakes even as the document is typed.

Page 82: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

82 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

Important Questions and Answers 1. How will you create a new table in the document?

The following steps are used to create a table. 1. When Table����Insert����Table is selected from the menu bar, the insert table dialog box

appears on the screen. 2. In the Name text box the name of the table is given. 3. Using the spin arrows in the columns and Rows text box the number of rows and columns entered. 4. Star Office writer displays table as a grid with the specified numbers each cell includes a

border. 5. By default each cell includes a border.

2. In Star Office Writer how will you add required num ber of rows and columns in a table? � The simplest way to add a row is the press Tab key in the last row of the table Star Office

Writer adds a new row. � To insert a row select the icon and press once. Now a new row is inserted below

the present row. � To insert a column select the icon and press once. Now a new column is inserted to

the right of the present column. [Or]

� To insert more than one or row column in the table, Table����Insert����Rows and Table����Insert����Columns command is used.

3. In Star Office Writer how will you delete the rows and columns in table? Rows and columns can be deleted by selecting the following commands. Table����Delete����Rows -- To delete rows Table����Delete����Columns -- To delete columns

4. In Star office writer how to change the row height and column width? To change the row/column width, follow these steps. � To resize a column, place the cursor in a table cell, hold down Alt and Press left or right

arrow. � To resize a column without changing the width of the table, hold down Alt+Ctrl , and then

press the left or right arrows. � To resize a row, place the cursor in the row hold down Alt and then press up or down

arrow. � Alternatively Table Format dialog box is used to change the column width of a table. � Table����Table Properties command is used to open table format dialog box.

5. How to make the selected rows and columns of the same size? � Select the rows and columns that are to be resized. � To make all columns even, right click inside table and select Column����Space Equally

in the pop-up menu. � To make all rows even, right click inside table and select Rows����Space Equally in the

pop-up menu.

CHAPTER-4: WORKING WITH TABLES

Page 83: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

83 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

6. How to deleting the entire table? To delete the table the following steps are used. 1. The entire table is selected using Edit����Select All command while keeping the insertion

point inside the table. 2. The menu option Table����Delete����Table is used to delete the selected Table.

7. How will you delete only entries in the table? � The entire table is selected by dragging the mouse across it. [Or] use the command

Edit����Select All to select the table. � Now, Delete key is pressed. � Now, only the entries are deleted and not the table.

Extra Questions and Answers 8. How a cell does become a taller?

� Any amount of text can be typed within the cell. � If the entry is a long one, when the text or data reaches the cell border star office writer will

wrap the text to the next line and expand the cell making it taller but not wider. 9. Define Table and Cell?

� Table is a grid of rows and columns. � Cell is a intersection of rows and columns. � Grid is a combination of rows and columns. � Rows are horizontal line of a table. � Columns are vertical line of a table. � Tables can be easily inserted at any point in the document. � Rows and columns can be added and deleted at either at the beginning, end or in the

middle of the table.

Important Questions and answers 1. What is margin?

Margins control how to close Star Office Writer prints to the edge of the page. The default margins are 1 inch top and bottom. The default margins are 1.25 inches left and right.

2. What does page formatting mean? � Page formatting means formatting the page or document to be printed that is margin

controls, page orientation, header, footer are the some of the page formatting options in star office writer.

3. What is meant by header and footer? � Header is an area at the top of the page. � Footer is an area of bottom of the page.

4. How will you insert the page number in a document? i) Click in the header or footer area. ii) Clicking on Insert����Fields����Page Number will insert page number on every page.

CHAPTER-5: PAGE FORMATTING

Page 84: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

84 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

5. What are the two types of page orientation? There are two types of page orientation in Star Office Writer. They are 1. Portrait:

• The length of the document will be more than the width. This orientation is called portrait.

• The default page orientation is Portrait. 2. Landscape:

• The width of the document will be more than the length. This orientation is called Landscape.

6. What is the purpose of creating header and footer? � It is used to refer the page easily. � It helps the reader to identify the document easily. � Header and Footer are some references remarks added at every page of the document of

the top and bottom margins respectively. � Header is an area at the top of page. It holds headings like author name, topic name etc. � Footer is an area at the bottom of page. It holds date, page number etc.

7. How will you create header in a page? i) Use Format����Page command to open page style dialog box. ii) To create a header, the Header tab on the page dialog box can be used. The screen

with various options for the header appears. iii) The Header on check box is selected. iv) Four spin boxes are also displayed. In those spin boxes the distance of the header from

the text area, the header height, the distance from the left margin and the right margin are entered.

v) Click Ok button. Now the header can be created on the page. 8. How will you create footer in a page?

i) Use Format����Page command to open page style dialog box. ii) To create footer, the Footer tab on the page dialog box can be used. The screen with

various options for the footer appears. iii) The Footer on check box is selected. iv) Four spin boxes are also displayed. In those spin boxes the distance of the footer from

the text area, the Footer height, the distance from the left margin and the right margin are entered.

v) Click Ok button. Now the Footer can be created on the page. Extra Questions and Answers

9. How can the ruler be used to change the margin? 1. If the ruler is not displayed in the screen, View����Ruler is clicked. 2. The gray area of the ruler indicates the margin’s top area. 3. When the mouse pointer is in the right spot, it changes into a line with arrows on both

sides. 4. The margin guide is dragged to a new location.

Page 85: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

85 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

10. How will you change the margins by using page style dialog box? 1. Format����Page command is selected. Page style dialog box appeared. 2. Click the Page tab, if necessary. 3. In margins group, type the new values in the spin boxes or use the spin arrows to change

the value. 4. Click OK button. 5. Use the File����Page Preview can be used to see the change.

11. How do we set a margin to a document? (Or) What are the methods through which margin can be changed?

The margins for a particular page can be set to an exact value using page style dialog box or approximately using ruler.

12. What is the use of Page Preview? File����Page Preview option can be used to see the changes. This option gives an overall picture of the document. It visually shows to the user, how change the has affected the document.

13. How will you change the page orientation or paper size? To change the orientation or paper size, the following steps are used.

� The Format����Page option is clicked. The Page Style dialog box appeared. � Click the Page tab if necessary. � Select the paper format from the Format drop down list in the paper format section or enter

the values in the width and Height spin boxes. � For changing the orientation portrait or landscape radio buttons are used.

14. How will you include the text in the header and footer area created? (Or) Write down the steps involved in including text in header and footer? Once the header and footer are created, the text to be included can be specified. This can be done in the following steps. i) Click the header or footer area. ii) Click on Insert����Fields. A sub menu with a list of options appears. Clicking on an

option in the list will insert the appropriate text in all the pages. vi) Click Ok button. Now the Footer can be created on the page.

Important Questions and Answers 1. What is an Electronic spreadsheet?

An electronic spreadsheet is a worksheet used in a computer to create and quickly perform “What if” analysis of inter related columnar data in worksheets.

2. List any four advantages of electronic spreadsheet? � Accurate results to any desired level of decimal points possible. � Worksheets can be quite big in size. � Any part of the worksheet can be viewed or edited. � Worksheet can be saved and retrieved later.

CHAPTER-6: SPREADSHEET

Page 86: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

86 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

3. What are the popular spreadsheet software? (Or) Write the name of popular spreadsheet software?

Name of the software Developers Year 1. VisiCalc 2. Lotus 1-2-3 3. Quattro Pro 4. Improve 5. M.S-Excel 6. Star Office Calc

Don Bricklin and Bob Franskton Lotus Corporation Borland International Lotus Corporation Micro Soft Corporation Sun Micro Systems

1979 1982

4. Write some spreadsheet applications? i) Payment of bills. ii) Income tax calculations. iii) Invoices or Bills. iv) Account Statements. v) Inventory Control. vi) Cost-Benefits analyses. vii) Financial Accounting viii) Tender evaluation. ix) Result analyses of students.

5. Define Cell and Cell pointer? Cell: The intersection of rows and columns creates cells. Active Cell:

� The active cell in you want to type the data is identified by the cell pointer which is a rectangular box covering that cell. The cell pointer is always in cell A1.

6. How to saving the Worksheet? � File����Save (Or) File����Save As command is selected. � Save As dialog box will be appear on the screen. In that dialog box type the name in File

Name text box and click Save button. � Ctrl+S and Save icon on standard tool bar is also used to save the worksheet

7. Can we change the data present in a cell? If so how? (Or) How will you edit the content of the worksheet?

Yes, we can edit the contents of the worksheet in two ways. � Type in the new data. The new data will simply overwrite the old contents of the cell. � Click on the formulae bar with the mouse or press the F2 function key or simply double

click on the cell. A vertical cursor appears on the formulae bar. Move the cursor to the left using the left arrow key or backspace key and edit the data.

8. What is range and range address? Range: A continuous group of cells in a worksheet is called a Range. Range Address: A Range address is the address of the first cell in the range, followed by a colon followed by address of the last cell in the range. Ex: A1:A10

Page 87: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

87 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

9. What is date Arithmetic? Give example? � Manual date calculations can be tricky because we have to keep track of the number of

days in a month. � In Star Office Calc we can add a number to a date and arrive at a new date, find the

difference between two dates and use a wide variety of function and formats to get what we want.

� Example: Enter the date 4/8/12 in cell A1. Enter =A1+4 in cell A2.

The new date will displayed as 4/12/12 in cell A2. 10. What is text operators?

� Text operators combine sections of text to the entire text. Operator Name Example

& ( AND) Text Operator “Star”&”Office” yields Star Office. 11. What are reference operators?

Reference operator combine cell areas. : and ! are the reference operators in star office calc.

Operator Name Example : (Colon) ! (Exclamation)

Range Intersection

A1:A5 =sum(A1:A5!B1:B5)

12. Write the order of precedence of operator in Star Office Calc? The order as follows

1. Exponentiation (^) 2. Negation (-) 3. Multiplication and Division (*, / ) 4. Addition and Subtraction (+, -)

13. What are the difference between relative cell addressing and absolute cell addressing? Relative Cell Address Absolute Cell Address

1. When formulae is copied the contents of the cells used in the formulae can change.

2. No sign is used to made relative cell address.

3. Ex: C4

1. When formulae is copied, the contents of the cells used in the formulae cannot be change.

2. $ sign is used to made absolute cell address.

3. Ex: $C$4 14. What is Function?

� Functions are predefined formulae that are available in star office calc. � Star Office Calc has a wide variety of functions that allow you to perform several

frequently done calculations. � The Insert����Function command can be used to insert the function. Ex: SUM, SQRT

15. What is Auto Format Sheet? The Auto format sheet facility of star office calc helps to format the worksheet with

different Pre defined styles and colors. Format����Autoformat command is used.

Page 88: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

88 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

16. What is the use Fill command? The Fill command is used to generate a series. It is used to copy the content of the cell into another cell.

17. Explain the how to generate the series 33,30…………..3 1. Select the command Edit����Fill����Series. 2. Fill series dialog box appeared on the screen. 3. In this box enter the value 33 at Start Value text box. 4. Enter the value 3 at End Value text box. 5. Enter the value -3 at Increment text box.

18. How will you insert picture the into the spreadsheet? � Choose any one cell and Select the command Insert����Picture����From file. � Insert Picture dialog box appears on the screen, you can directly select the desired file from the gallery directory of star office calc. After selecting the picture click open.

19. How to change the Row height of a worksheet in star office calc? � To Change the Row height, select the row whose height you want to change. � Click on Format����Row����Height. Row height dialog box appears on the screen. Type

the new row height in row height dialog box. Click on OK button. 20. How to change the Column width of a worksheet in star office calc?

� To Change the Column width, select the Column whose width you want to change. � Click on Format����Column����Width. Column width dialog box appears on the screen.

Type the new Column width in column width dialog box. Click on OK button. Extra Questions and Answers

21. Name the first electronic spreadsheet. When it is used? � VisiCalc “The Visible Calculator” was the first electronic spreadsheet. Dan Bricklin and

Bon Frankston invented the VisiCalc for Apple II in 1979. VisiCalc have 63 columns and 254 Rows.

22. Define the spreadsheet and worksheet? (Or) Differentiate the terms spreadsheet and worksheet?

Spreadsheet Worksheet The term “Spreadsheet has come to refer specifically to the software packages.

Worksheet refers to the files that you create with spreadsheet software.

23. How Lotus1-2-3 became very popular? Lotus Development Corporation introduced Lotus 1-2-3 in 1982. This package become very popular of its to combine database management and graphics feature with its spreadsheet.

24. What is the use of electronic spreadsheet? The power of the spreadsheet lies is the fact that the cells can contain formulae, which perform certain mathematical operations on the data in other cells and display the results in a new cell.

25. Write the process of creating a worksheet? (Or) What are the steps involved n creating a worksheet? 1. Organizing the data. 2. Entering the data.

Page 89: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

89 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

3. Creating Formulae. 4. Editing the worksheet. 5. Formatting values label and cells. 6. Adding charts if required. 7. Analyzing the data and printing the worksheet.

26. How will you move the cell pointer around the worksheet? � You can change the position of the cell pointer by clicking the mouse on the concerned

cell or by using the arrow keys on the keyboard. � The Tab, home, end, page up, page down keys on the keyboard also allow you to move

around the worksheet. 27. How will you open a worksheet?

� Use File����Open command or Open icon on standard tool bar. � Open dialog box with a list of files appears on the screen. � Select the file that you want by clicking on it and the click on open.

28. How will you quit or exit from star Office? (Or) H ow will you close Star Office? File����Exit command is used to quit from Star Office.

29. How a formula does begin in Star office calc? Give example. The syntax of formulae begins with an equal sign followed by a combination of values, operators and cell references. The sequence is the sequence of characters used in formulae. Example: =sum(A1+B1) = 5+5

30. What are arithmetic operators? � Arithmetic operators return numerical results.

Operator Name Example +(Plus)

-(Minus) -(Minus)

*(Asterisk) / (Slash)

% (Percent) ^ (Carat)

Addition Subtraction Negation

Multiplication Division Percent

Exponentiation

5+5 5-5 -4

5*5 5/5

15%2 5^5

31. What are comparative operators? � Comparative operators return either true or false. It is also called as Relational operators.

Operators Name Example = > < >= <= < >

Equal Greater than Less than Greater than or equal to Less than or equal to In equality

A1=B1 A1>B1 A1<B1 A1>=B1 A1<=B1 A1< >B1

32. What are the types of cell referencing? (Or) What are the types of cell address? There are two types of cell reference in calc. 1. Relative Cell referencing 2. Absolute Cell referencing Relative cell addressing is the default type of cell addressing used by star office calc.

Page 90: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

90 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

33. Write note on Sum functions in a work sheet? � One of the most commonly used function is the Sum function. � Sum function calculates the sum of a given set of numbers. � To use this function you can either click on the Function Wizard icon or then select sum or

you can just click on the sum icon on the formulae tool bar. � Star office calc suggests a range of cells for which sum is to be calculated. � Press Enter key to accept this suggested range or press the Backspace key and type in the

range you want. 34. Write note SQRT functions in worksheet?

SQRT function is used to find the square root of number. To insert the SQRT function. � Place the cursor in the cell where you want to insert the function and click on the Function Wizard icon. � Select Mathematical from Category. � Select the SQRT function from the list of functions.Which appears by double clicking on it. � The function wizard displays a brief description of function and prompt you to enter the number or the cell address on which the function should work. � Enter the number 64 and click Ok. � Now the result 8 is displayed in the cell of the worksheet.

35. How will you copy a content of one cell into other cells? i) To copy the contents of a cell, click on the cell. ii) Click and drag the mouse to highlight all the cells where you want to copy the contents. iii) Now select Edit����Fill����Down or Edit����Fill����Left. iv) The content of first cell will be copied in all the highlighted cells.

36. How will you insert Special characters in a worksheet? To insert special character in a worksheet place the cell pointer in any cell. Choose the command Insert����Special Characters. Select the desired character from the special character dialog box. Click OK Button.

37. Write note on chart? What is the use of chart? � Graphics representations of numbers are known as chart. Chart is used to visually present

the data for easy understanding. � Charts are used to make data easier to understand. Insert����Chart command is used to

work with chart. 38. How will you print a part of worksheet?

� To print a part of worksheet select the range to be printed and � Click on Format����Print Range����Edit to select the print ranges. � Now click on print icon. Only selected range will be printed. � To remove the print range setting Format����Print Range����Delete command is used.

39. How will you print the worksheet with gridlines? Choose the command Format����Page ����Sheet Tab����Grid command is used to print the worksheet with grid lines.

Page 91: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

91 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

Important Questions and Answers 1. What distinguish information from data?

Data Information 1. Data is input to the computer.

2. Data are raw facts collected such as

those collected by an organization to record transactions.

3. Data does not give meaning.

1. Information’s are output from the computer.

2. Information consists of usable sets of data.

3. Information can give meaning.

2. What are the steps are involved in data processing? Data processing involves 4 steps.

1. Data collection 2. Data verification 3. Validation of Data 4. Report generation

3. What is Data Base? � A database is repository of collection of related data or fact. It arranges them in a specific

structure. � Data in a database is mostly commonly viewed in one or more two-dimensional tables,

each consisting of columns and rows. 4. What is Data Base Management System?-DBMS

A DBMS is a program, or collection of programs that allows any number of users to access data, modify it and construct simple and complex requests to obtain and work with selected records.

5. What is primary key? A primary key is a key that uniquely identifies a record in a database table. In relational database, a primary key can consists of one or more database fields. Ex: Reg. No

6. What are the general categories of DBMS? 1. Entering data into the database. 2. Reordering records in the database. 3. Obtaining subsets of the data.

7. What is file, Record, Field? (Or) What are the three components that make up a database? File: The entire collection or related data in one table is referred to as file. Record: Each row in table represents a record. Record is a set of data for each database entry. Field: Each table column represents a field. Field groups each piece or item of data among the records into specific categories or types of data.

8. Define multiple sorting? Multiple sorting means sorting on more than one field of a table at the same time. Sort icon is used for multiple sorting.

CHATER-7: DATABASE

Page 92: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

92 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

9. What is filter? � A filter is also a type of query. � Filter is used to select and display records which match a certain condition. � The remaining records are hidden from the user. � Star Office Base has two types of filters.

o Auto Filter o Standard Filter [ Default Filter]

10. What is Auto Filter? The Auto Filter icon is available on the toolbar. Click on this icon to display only the

records, which match the value of the current field .

11. What is Standard Filter? Filter used with a condition called Default Filter. The condition can be specified by clicking on the Standard Filter icon tool bar.

12. What is the difference between Query and Filter? Query Filter

1. Queries can be saved. 2. Queries are user constructed

statements.

1. Filter cannot be saved. 2. Filter is also a type of query.

13. What is Reports? A report is printed information that is assembled by gathering data based on user supplied criteria.

[Or] A report is printed information based on a query that gathers criteria-matching data and in some cases, performs mathematical calculations.

14. What is Queries? � Queries are special views of the data in a table. � Queries are user constructed statements that set conditions for selecting and manipulating

data in one more than tables and assembling the criteria matching data into information. 15. What is Forms?

Forms are user defined screens that are used to make it easier to enter, view and edit the data in a table or a query.

A form is simply screen that displays the fields of a record in a well spaced out manner. 16. How will you insert a calc cell range into a text document?

1. Open a Star Office Writer document. 2. Open a Star Office Calc that contains the data. 3. In the spreadsheet, select the cell range that you want to display as a table in the text

document. 4. Choose Edit����Copy. 5. In the text document, choose Edit����Paste Special. 6. In the paste special dialog, select DDE link and then click OK . 7. The copied cell range will now be displayed in the text document. 8. Now modify the data in the spreadsheet. You will see the data automatically changes the in

the text document.

Page 93: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

93 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

17. How will you copy data by drag and drop method? You can use drag-and-drop to copy text and Objects between Star Office applications. For Example, if you want copy a cell range from a calc sheet inside a presentation slide proceed as follows.

1. Open Star Office Impress presentation. 2. Open the Calc spreadsheet that contains the data you want to copy. 3. In the spreadsheet, select the cell range that you want to copy. 4. Just drag-and –drop the selected range into the presentation(use Alt+Tab) to open the

presentation window). 18. How will you sort the records in a table?

We can sort the records in ascending or descending order based on any field in the table. 1. Select the table that you want to sort. 2. Select the field you want to sort by clicking on the field name at the top of the table. Note

that the entire column becomes highlighted. 3. Then click on Sort Ascending icon to sort the records in ascending order.

4. Click on sort Descending icon to sort the records in descending order.

19. What is Hierarchical data base? The hierarchical database structures were primarily used on Main Frame computers.

In hierarchical databases, records are organized in a tree like structure by type. The relationship between record is said to be a parent-child relationship, in which any child type relates only to a single parent type.

20. What is Network data base? The network database is very similar to the hierarchical structure except that any one

record type can relate to any number of other record types. Extra Questions and Answers

21. What is data? � The data is as fact about people, places or some entities in computers, data is simply the

value assigned to a variable. � The term of data comes from the word datum.

22. What is information? � Information is defined as a set of processed data that convey the relationship between

data considered. Information is as group of related data convey some meaning. Information consists of usable sets of data.A DBMS is used to assemble information from data. Ex: Raja is studying 12 std.

23. What are the types of data processing? There are two types of data processing.

1. Manual data processing 2. Computerized data processing

Page 94: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

94 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

24. What are the types of database? There are 5 types of database.

1. Flat file data base 2. Relational data base 3. Hierarchical database 4. Network database 5. Object oriented database

25. .How will you view you view and modify the table design? To view and modify the design of an existing table,

� Click the Table from <Database> pane. � Select the table to be modified and right click on it. � Select Edit from the sub menu that appears. � A window with the existing table design appears. � Here we can modify the table design.

26. What are the uses of query languages? � Search the database to locate records. � Established relationship or links between tables to update records. � List a subset of records. � Perform calculations. � Delete obsolete records. � Perform other data management tasks.

27. What is structured Query Language?-SQL. SQL stands for Structured Query Language. SQL is a special query language for communication with a database by describing data

and sometimes instructing the DBMS to do something with the data. 28. List the various field types that can exist in a data types?

Star Office Base allows you to use twenty different field type are given below. 1. Text[VARCHAR] 2. Text[VARCHAR_IGNORECASE] 3. Text(fix) 4. Number 5. Date/Time 6. Date 7. Time 8. Yes/No 9. Memo 10. Image 11. Decimal 12. Binary Field(Fixed) 17. Big int 13. Binary Field 18. Float 14. Integer 19. Real 15. Tiny Integer 20. Double 16. Small Integer

Page 95: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

95 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

Important Questions and Answers 1. What is multimedia?

Multimedia is a computer based presentations technique that incorporates text, graphics, sound, animations and video elements.

A combination of these elements grabs the viewers attention and retains it. 2. What are the image formats used to store the photographs?

Some of the images format is GIF files, JPG files, animated GIF files, MPEG files, Shockwave files and NxView files.

3. What is animation? Animations are primarily used to illustrate or demonstrate an idea or a concept. Unlike videos that are usually taken from life, animations are based on drawings. 1. Two-Dimensional animations(2D) 2. Three-Dimensional animations(3D)

4. What is cel-based animation? Cel-based animations consists of multiple drawings, each one a little different from the others.

When displayed in rapid sequence these drawings appear to move. 5. What is object-based animation?

Object-based animations also referred to as slide or path animations are created by moving an object across a screen.

This type of animations are usually seen in computer games. For Example, a ball moving across the screen.

6. What are the steps processes to create 3D Animation? Creating 3-D animation is a three step process:

1. Modeling 2. Animating 3. Rendering

7. What is compression? Explain its two types? Compression is technique by which a recurring set of information is identified and replaced by a single piece of information. Lossless Compression: Retains the exact image throughout the compression. Lossy Compression: Provides a comparatively higher ratio of compression but results in some loss of quality.

8. What is Morphing? Morphing is a technique by which you can blend two or more images to form a new image.

9. What is Warping? Warping is the technique of distorting a single image to represent something else.

10. What is the special software to create the multimedia? 1. Flash 2. Dream Weaver 3. Maya

CHAPTER-8: MULTIMEDIA

Page 96: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

96 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

11. What is inline sound and video? � When sound and video is included as part of a webpage then it is called inline sound or

video. We can add inline sound to a webpage by using the <bgsound> and<img> tags. � Sounds and Video in multimedia applications can be played “inline” or by “helper”.

12. What is plug-in? A helper application also called as a plug-in. Plug-in is a program that can be launched by the browser to help play sound or video.

13. Write the name of the popular multimedia formats? � MIDI format � Real Audio/Real Video format � AU format � AIFF format � SND format � Wave format � MP3/MPEG format � AVI format � Window Media format � Quick Time format � Shock Wave format

14. What is meant by sampling? Before including sounds in an application, we have to convert the analog sound waves into a digital format.

This conversion of analog sound waves into a digital format is called sampling. 15. Write note on AVI format?

AVI stands Audio Video Interleave. The AVI format was developed by Microsoft in 1992. It is very common format on the internet. Video files stored in the AVI format have the extension .avi

Extra Questions and Answers 16. Define MMS.

� MMS stands for Multimedia Messaging System. The MMS is a application that allows send and receive messages over cell phones.

� These are popularly being used to send and receive jokes, music, ring tones, pictures and some items.

17. Mention some fields which use multimedia applications? (Or) List some of the multimedia applications? � Multimedia applications are being used in a variety of different fields. � Some fields where multimedia is commonly used include entertainment, education

research and business. 18. What is interactive multimedia?

Multimedia applications that allow user to actively participate instead of just sitting by as passive recipients of information are called interactive multimedia. Ex: Games

Page 97: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

97 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

19. What are the uses of CBT and WBT? � The most common version of E-learning packages are CBT and WBT. � CBT stands for Computer Based Tutorials. � WBT stands for Web Based Tutorials. � CBT/WBT today are used to cover a wide range of topics including orienting new

employees joining an organization, training employees on new software application and systems used in an organization.

20. What are the types of 2D animations? 1. Cel-based animation 2. Object-based animation

21. What is the use of morphing? (Or) What is the use of warping? Most modern multimedia applications, particularly games, combine these techniques with virtual reality to create an environment in which gives the viewer the feeling that he is part of that environment.

22. How can helper applications be launched? Helper applications can be launched using the <embed>, <applet> or<object> tags.

23. List out the use of multimedia in the field of entertainment? In the field of entertainment, multimedia is widely used

• To add special effect to movies

• To create animated films

• To create cartoon strips

• To create computer games 24. What is the use of self paced learning’s?

� The learner can learn by himself at a pace and time that he is comfortable with. � Plus there is no instruction � The learner does not have to travel to a location to that the class.

25. What is virtual reality? � The environment is created by using input devices like joysticks and sensors and by

using output devices like headphones and goggles. � The various multimedia components are coordinated with a technique called virtual

reality. � Virtual reality is sued in games and flight simulator. � Flight simulation is used to impart training to pilots.

26. What are the elements of Multimedia? Multimedia elements are sound, animation, and video.

27. What is vector graphics? � Vector graphics help in rendering the image effectively on the screen. � Many vendors provide special hardware called vector graphics card to improve the

efficiency in the display of images. 28. What are the attributes of sound?

� The sounds that we hear are analog wave patterns. � Two attributes control the characteristics of sound-amplitude and frequency.

Page 98: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

98 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

29. What are the difference between GIF and JPG? GIF JPG

1. GIF is limited to 8 bit palette.

2. a GIF file creates a perfect reproduction of the original while a JPG does not.

3. It is a lossless format.

1. JPG uses more colours.

2. A JPG file uses a much more complex technique that GIF to compress images like photograph, where the color is every pixel is different.

3. It is a lossy format. 30. Write notes on JPEG file?

� JPEG stands for Joint Photographic Experts Group. � The JPEG image files are a lossy format. � Nearly all digital cameras have the option to save images in JPEG format. � The JPEG format supports full color and produce relatively small file sizes. � GIF and JPEG files compress static bitmap images.

31. What is sound forge? � We can add special effects such as echo, fade in, and fadeout effects by using sound

forge. � Sound Forge is a sound editing program.

32. Write note video files? � Video files tend to be very heavy. � Several elements such as frame rate, image size and color depth determine the size of

these files. � We can very these elements to reduce the file size to acceptable levels. � Reducing the color depth to less than 256 colors results in the image looking murky. � Reducing the frame count to less than 15 frames per second causes the video to look

jerky. 33. Write note on MIDI format?

� MIDI stands for Musical Instruments Digital Interface. � The MIDI formats is commonly used for transferring music information between

electric music devices like synthesizes and sound cards in computers. � MIDI was developed in 1982. � MIDI format is a very flexible format that can be used for a wide range of musical

application. � The MIDI format cannot contain sounds. It contain only digital notes. � MIDI files are relatively light. � Sound files in the MIDI format have the extension .mid or .midi

34. Write note on Real Audio/Video format? � The Real Audio format was developed by Real Network in 1995. � It support both sound and video. � This format is more popular for transfer of data over the internet and allows you stream

files even over internet communications with low bandwidth. � However, the quality of these transmissions is often poor. � Files in this format have the extension .rm or .ram

Page 99: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

99 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

35. Write note on AIFF format? � The AIFF stands for Audio Interchange File Format. � It was developed by Apple. � This is not a very popular format as it is neither cross platform nor is it supported by all

web browsers. Files in this format have the extension .aif or .aiff 36. Write note on SND format?

� The sound format (SND) was developed by Apple. � The SND format neither cross platform nor supported by popular web browsers. � Files in the SND format have the extension .snd

37. Write note on WAVE format? The wave format was developed by IBM and Microsoft. It is one of the more popular formats as it is not only supported by all computers running the windows operating systems, but also by all popular web browsers.

Files in the wave format have the extension .wav 38. Write note on MP3/MPEG format?

The MPEG format was developed by the Moving Pictures Experts Group. This MPEG format developed for video files. MP3 format is used to stored sounds(Music). MP3/MPEG formats have become one of the most popular format on the internet in recent years.

Sound files stored in the MP3 format have the extension .mp3 or .mpga Video files stored in the MPEG format have the extension .mpg or .mpeg

39. Write note on Quick Time format? The Quick Time format was developed by Apple primarily to store videos. It is popular format on the internet but requires the installation of an additional component in windows computers.

Files in the Quick Time format have the extension .mov 40. Write note on Shockwave format?

The shockwave format was developed by Macromedia. Shockwave format is used to store multimedia component created using Flash. This format requires an extra component to play. However this additional component comes preinstalled with the latest versions of Netscape and Internet Explorer.

Files in the shockwave format have the extension .swf 41. Write note on Window Media player format?

The windows media format was developed by Microsoft. It is one of the very popular formats on the internet and on computers with the windows operating systems.

The format requires the installation often additional component in non windows computer.

Files in the windows media format have the extension .wmv

Page 100: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

100 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

42. Write note on AU format? � The AU(Audio) format is another sound format that is supported by most of the popular

software’s in the market across different platforms. � Files in the AU format have the extension .au

43. Write about multimedia hardware? Most common personal computers are adequate to work with multimedia. However, some additional hardware and high resolution monitors would greatly enhance the effectiveness of working multimedia.

44. What is the disadvantage of inline sound and video? The disadvantage of using inline sound or video is that it plays automatically whenever the webpage load without giving the viewer and control.

45. What are the advantages of helper applications over inline application? The advantage of using helper applications is that you can allow the viewer control some or all of the player settings.

For example the viewer can control the volume settings, in addition to letting him rewind, play, pause and stop the sound or the video.

Important Questions and Answers 1. What is meant by presentation?

Presentation are one of the most powerful and effective ones to communicate to an audience.

We can include a variety of items such as text, audio, hand-drawn images and videos. A presentation is used to while speaking to a group with a presentation to support and organize your information.

2. What is normal view? Normal view is used to allow you to create and edit slides.

3. What is outline view? Outline view is used to allow you to reorder slides, edit the slide titles and heading.

4. What is notes view? Notes view is used to allow you to add the notes to the slides or view and existing notes for the slide. Notes are typically used by a presenter to add additional information to a slide.

5. What is handout view? Handout view is used to allow you to scale the slides so that several slides can fit into a page. This view is typically used when the presentation is to be printed and distributed as a handout.

6. What is slide sorter view? Slide Sorter view is sued to allow you to view miniature images of all the slides in the presentation. This view is also used to rearrange slides.

7. What is layout? Layout page displays the various layouts provided by Star Office impress. You can choose a layout while creating a new slide.

CHAPTER-9: PRESENTATION

Page 101: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

101 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

8. What is Master Page? Master page can be sued to specify basic background information that to be included in all the slides.

For example you can insert a company logo to the master slide and it will appear in all the slides.

9. What is Custom animation? Custom animation displays various options that allow you to add or modify animation effects to elements of a slide.

10. What is slide transition? This page displays various transition effects that can be attached to a slide along with other options that allow you to control the transition of the slides.

11. How to saving a presentation? By selecting File����Save (or) Ctrl+S. The Save As dialog box appeared. In this box enter the presentation name and click Save button.

12. How to starting a presentation? The following ways to start a presentation. 1. Click the Slide show icon. 2. Use Slide Show����Slide show command. 3. Press F5 key.

13. How to insert, delete and Rename the slides? 1. Insert a slide: Choose the Insert����Slide from the menu bar. The new slide uses the page

layout of the previous slide. 2. Delete a slide: If you want to delete a slide, select the slide and press the Delete key. Or

right click on the slide and choose Delete Slide. 3. Rename the Slide: If you want to rename the slide, select the slide and choose the

Slide�Rename Slide command. Or right click on the slide and choose Rename Slide. 14. How to changing the slide order?

To change the slide order, click Slide Sorter view in the switching presentation view tab. A slide sorter window opens all slides in the presentation document are displayed in reduced size. Click the slide you want to move and drag it with the mouse to the desired position. A vertical bars indicates the position where the slide will be inserted.

15. How to insert a picture into a presentation? To insert a picture in a slide choose Insert����Picture����From file command. An open dialog box appears. Choose the desired picture to be inserted from the open dialog box.

16. How to changing the slide Background? Choose Format����Page����Background command. Select the background fill from the following options.

o Color o Gradient o Hatching o Bitmap Image

Page 102: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

102 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

17. How create a custom slide show? Choose the Slide Show����Custom Slide Show and then click New. Custom Slide Show dialog box appears. Enter a name for your slide show in the Name box. Under Existing Slides, select the slides you want to add to your slide show and click >> button. Hold down shift to select a range of slides or Ctrl to select multiple slides.

You can change the order of the slides in your custom slide show, by dragging the slides under selected slides.

Click OK . 18. How to hide a slide?

Select the slide(s) that you want t hide in the slide show. Choose the Slide Show����Show/Hide Slide.

19. What is Rehearse Timings? Star Office assists you in defining the right rehearse timings for automatic slide changes. Star Office records the display the time for each slide, So the next time you play the show with automatically slide changes the timing will be as recorded.

20. What is printing Handout? If you want to provide handouts you can use the handout View mode. Since the handouts contain both the individual slides and space for notes, they can be a very helpful presentation aid.

21. How to create the printing handout? Click the Handout View tab in the view bar. Open the Layout Pane in Task Pane. Choose a layout to specify how many slides are printed on a single sheet of paper.

22. What is the use of insert OLE object? This is used to imports object from other application into a presentation. For example Star Office spreadsheet formulae, text, and even Microsoft application objects can be inserted.

Extra Questions and Answers 23. What are the options available in first page of presentation wizard of Star Office

Impress? The first page of the presentation wizard displays three options that allows us: 1. To create an empty presentation. 2. Use a prescribed template to create a presentation. 3. Open an existing presentation.

24. How will you create a new presentation by using template in Star Office Impress? To create a new presentation using a template chose File����New Templates and Documents. Or by using Shift+Ctrl+N

25. How will you Create a new presentation? We can create a new presentation form with in any Star Office application by choosing File����New����Presentations or by using Star����All Programs����Star Office 8����Star Office Impress.

Page 103: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

103 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

26. What is the use of Default, Automatic, Duration of page, Duration of pause and show logo?

Default option allows you to manually control the transition of slide using options such as Mouse click.

The Automatic option allows you to specify the duration for each slide and will automatically flip through the slides at the specified speed.

The Duration of page spin box allows you to specify the duration for the slides. The Duration of pause spin box allows you to specify the duration for which the presentation will pause before it starts again.

Show logo check box will display the message “Created with Star Office” during pause between each presentation.

27. What can you do with the left pane of the presentation window? The slide pane on the left display a thumbnail image of the slide and allows you to rename, delete or rearrange them.

28. What can you do with the center pane of the presentation window? The pane in the center allows you to view the slide in the presentation. Center pane displays five tabs at the top that allow you to view the presentation in different formats.

29. What are the various formats for viewing of presentation? 1. Normal view 2. Outline view 3. Notes view 4. Handout view 5. Slide Sorter view 6. Master page 7. Layouts 8. Custom Animation 9. Slide Transition

30. What is slide show? A slide show is a series of slides or pages that present information on a specific topic.

31. What is custom slide show? Custom slide show allows you to display important slides during a presentation.

32. How to insert a Movie and Sound into a presentation? To insert a movie or sound in a slide choose Insert����Movie and Sound command. An open dialog box appears. Choose the desired movie to be inserted from the open dialog box.

33. How will you play a movie or sound in an impress presentation? To play a movie or sound file in an impress presentation. Open the slide that contains the movie or sound file. Click the object icon for the movie or sound file on the slide. Click play on the media play back tool bar.

Page 104: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

104 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

34. Write notes on media play back toolbar? Play icon - Plays the current file. Pause icon - pauses or resumes the playback of the current file. Stop icon - stops the playback of the current file. Repeat icon - Plays the file repeatedly. Position slider - Moves to a different position in the file. Mute icon - Turns sound off and on. Volume Slider - Adjust the volume Zoom - Adjust the size of the movie play back.

35. What is the use of Media Player window? � Star Office impress enables Media Player where you can Preview movie and sound file

as well as insert these files into the current presentation slide. � The media player supports many different media formats. � Tools����Media Player command is used to open media player window.

36. What is the use of Navigator? � Navigator window allows us to quickly jump from one slide to other slide or move

between open files. � Edit����Navigator command is used to open Navigator window.

37. How will you insert MS-Word document in Star Office Impress Slide? � To insert MS-Word document, choose Further objects and create option in the Insert

OLE object dialog box and click OK . � In the Insert Object dialog box select Micro Soft Word document as object type and

click OK . � Microsoft Word application is opened automatically. � Type your information in the MS Word and close it. Star Office impress automatically

saves the document and insert it into the slide. 38. How slides in impress can be designed?

Slides in impress can be designed according to different needs by using color, gradient, hatching and bitmap images.

39. Define Master Slide? A Master slide determines the text formatting styles for title, outline and the

background design for individual slides or for all of the slides in a presentation.

You can change the appearance of a master slide by applying a new slide design.

Page 105: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

105 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

Volume-II [C++]

Important Questions and Answers 1. What is an object? (Or) What is the significance of an object?

An Object is a group of related functions and data that serves those functions. An Object is a kind of a self sufficient sub program with a specific functional area.

2. What is encapsulation? The mechanism by which the data and functions are bound together with in an object definition is called as encapsulation.

3. What is inheritance? � Inheritance is the process of creating new classes called derived class, from the

existing or base classes. � The derived class inherits all the properties of the base class. � Derived class is a power packed class. � Inheritance is the most powerful feature of an object oriented programming

language. 4. What is Class?

The most important feature of C++ is the class. A class is a new way of creating and implementation a user defined data type. Classes provide a method for packing together data of different types. A class is away to bind and its associated functions together.

5. Define Polymorphism? The ability of an object to respond differently to different messages is called as

polymorphism. Polymorphism is a Greek word. Polymorphism means many forms. Polymorphism is achieved through overloading.

6. What are the advantages of object oriented programming? Class data type allows programs to organize as objects that contain both data and functions.

Data hiding or Abstraction of data provides security to data. Polymorphism reduces software complexity. Inheritance allows a class to be derived from an existing class.

CHAPTER-1: Object Oriented Concepts Using C++

Page 106: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

106 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

Important Questions and Answers 1. Define tokens?

� The basic types are collectively called as tokens. � A token is the smallest individual unit in a program.

2. How the tokens are classified? Tokens are classified into 5 types, they are

• Keywords • Identifiers • Constants • Operators • Punctuators

3. Define key words? Give example? Keywords have special meaning to the language compiler. These words are reserved words for special purposes. These words cannot be used as normal identifiers.

Ex: auto, break, case, for, while, do, else 4. What is meant by identifiers? (Or) What are the rules to be followed while writing

variable names? � Identifiers are also called as variables. Variables are memory boxes that hold values or

constants. � A variable name must begin with an alphabet or underscore followed by alphabets or

numbers. � A variable name must not begin with numbers.

Example: num12, _test are valid variable identifiers. 3num,+num are invalid identifiers

5. Define floating point constant? Floating point constant is a signed real number. Floating point constant have four portions. It includes an integer portion, a fractional portion, a decimal portion and an exponent. While representing a floating point constant the integer portion or the decimal portion can be omitted but never both. Ex : 58.64

6. Define string literals? (Or) What is array of characters? � String literal is a sequence of characters surrounded by double quotes. � String literals are treated as array of characters. � Each string literal is by default added with a special character ‘\0’ which the end of a

string. � Ex: “computer”

CHAPTER-2: Overview of C++

Page 107: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

107 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

7. Define Association? � Operators are executed in the order of precedence. The operands and the operators

are grouped in a specific logical way for evaluation. � This logical grouping is called as association.

8. Write down the operators which are specific to C++? : : (Scope operator) .* (Dereference operator) ->* (Dereference pointer to class member)

9. Define Conditional operators? ?: is a conditional operator. It is also called as ternary operator. The general syntax is E1?E2:E3; here E1,E2 and E3 are operands. E1 should essentially be of scalar type and E2 and E3 are values or statements.

Ex: max=(a>b)?a:b; 10. Define Assignment operators?

= is the simple assignment operator. It is used to assign the result of an expression(on the right hand side) to the variable (on the left hand side of the operator).

In addition to the simple assignment operator, there are 10 shorthand assignment operator. Ex: a=10;

11. Define sizeof( ) operators? � Sizeof is an operator. � It returns the size (memory requirement) in terms of bytes, of the given expression

or data type. 12. What is type definition? (Or) What is the use of type definition? (Or) Write note on

type definition? Typedef helps in creating meaningful data type identifiers, that would increase the readability of the program.

Syntax:

Example: typedef int marks; 13. Define enum? (Or) write note enumerated data type? (Or) What is the use of enum?

Another user defined data type is the enumerated data type. As the name suggests, enumerated data type helps users in creating a list of identifiers, also called as symbolic numeric constants of the type int.

Syntax:

Ex: enum holidays(Sunday,Monday)

typedef datatype userdefined datatype identifier;

enum identifiers(value1,value2…………..value n);

Page 108: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

108 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

14. What are the storage classes? There are four storages specifies in C++

o Auto o Static o Extern o Register

15. What are the important purposes of Void data type? Uses of void type

� To indicate the function does not return a value. � To declare a generic pointer.

16. How to declare a pointer variable? (Or) What is pointer variable? int *iptr; Name of the pointer variable Instructs the compiler that the variable is pointer( it will hold an address) Indicates that the pointer will to an int data type.

� The declaration statement int *iptr may be read as iptr is a pointer variable of the type int.

� The variable iptr of the can only store addresses that hold integer values. 17. How are pointer variable is differ from ordinary variable?

Ordinary variable Pointer variable 1. The name assigned to a data field that can assume any of a given set of values is defined as the variable. 2. Variables are user defined named entities of memory locations that can store data. 3. Ex: int a;

1. Pointer variable that holds a memory address. 2. Pointer variable provide the means thorough which the memory locations can be directly accessed. 3. Ex: int *a;

18. What are the impact of modifiers? The modifiers alter the base data type to be yield new data type.

� Unsigned modifiers the range of the integer values as the sign bit also used store data.

� Long increases the bytes for a particular data type, thus increasing the range of values.

19. What is type cast? � Type cast refers to the process of changing the data type of the value stored in a

variable. � Type cast is achieved by prefixing the variable or value with the required data type. � Type cast is restricted only to fundamental or standard data type.

Syntax: Ex: (float)7;

(data type)<variable/value> ; [Or] data type (variable/constant);

Page 109: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

109 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

20. What is the use of value at operator(asterix)? � * is called value at operator in C++. � It is used to declare a pointer variable � It is used to display the contents stored at a location. � It is a unary operator.

21. What are the relational operators in C++? � Relational operators are used to compare numeric values. � A relational expression is constructed using any two operands connected by a

relational operator. � The list of relational operators are

== equal to > greater than < less than >= greater than or equal to <= Less than or equal to != not equal to

22. List any four punctuators in C++ and write a line about them? Punctuators Purpose

; Terminates a C++ statement // Treats statements prefixed with this as comments ‘ ‘ is used to enclose a single characters

“ “ is used to enclose a set of characters 23. What are the data types?

� Data types are the kind of data that variable hold in programming language. � The ability to divide data into different types in C++ enables ne to work with

complex objects. � Data types can be broadly classified into the following three categories.

o User Defined Data type o Built in Data type o Derived Data type

24. Define Const qualifier? � The const qualifier specifies that the value of a variable will not change the run

time of a program. � The const qualifier is used like any other modifier where these variables is prefixed

with the keyword const following by data type. � Ex: const float pi=3.14;

25. What is implicit conversion? � Implicit conversion refers to data type changes brought in expressions by the

compiler. � Example: float f=7.6;

int x=f;

Page 110: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

110 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

26. How are the operators classified based on operand requirements? Based on operand requirements operators are classified into 3 types.

� Unary operator � Binary operator � Ternary Operator

Extra Questions and Answers 27. What is constant? What are the types of constant?

� Constants are data items whose values cannot be changed. � A Constants is of numeric or non numeric type. � Numeric constants consists of only numbers, either whole number or decimal numbers � Constants are 4 types

1. Integer constant 3. Floating point constant 2. Character constant 4. String constant

28. What is escape sequence? Non graphic characters are represented using escape sequence. Escape sequence are representing using characters prefixed with a backslash ( \ ). Ex: \a To make bell sound \b To give a backspace \n To make a new line \v To give vertical tab

29. Define integer constant? � Integer constant must have at least one digit and must not contain any fractional

part. � May be prefixed with a + or – sign. � A sequence of digits with 0 is treated as octal constant. Ex: 010 � A sequence of digits with 0X is treated as hexadecimal integer. Ex: 0XF

30. Define character constant? � A character constant is a constant that contains a single character enclosed with in

single quotes. � Single character may be a alphabet or number or any special character. � Ex: ‘a’ , ‘+’, ‘*’

31. What is operator? Give example? � Operator specifies an operation to be performed that yields a new value. � An operand is an entity on which an operator acts. � Ex: c=a+b � Here a,b,c are operands and + is a operator.

32. How the operators are classified in C++? (Or) Name the classification of operators? � Operator are classified as

o Arithmetic operator o Assignment operator o Component selection operator o Conditional operator o Logical operator o Manipulation operator

Page 111: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

111 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

o Member de referencing operator o Memory Management operator o Preprocessor operator o Relational operator o Scope operator o Shift operator o Type cast operator

33. How arithmetic expressions are formed? � Arithmetic expressions are formed using arithmetic operators, numerical

constants/variables, function call connected by arithmetic operators. � Example: a%=5

a=2+6 34. List out the unary operators in C++?

Operator Name & ! *

++ ~ -- - +

Address of Logical

Indirection Increment Bitwise

Decrement Unary minus Unary plus

35. What are the arithmetic operators in C++? � Arithmetic operators are used to perform mathematical operators. � The list of arithmetic operators are

+ Addition operator - subtraction operator * Multiplication operator / Division Operator % Modulus operator-given the remainder of an integer division. +=,-=,*=, /=, %=

36. Define Logical operators (Boolean operators)? � Logical operators combines the results of one or more conditions. � The various logical operators are &&(AND), ||(OR), ! (NOT) � Ex: x=(a==b)&&(b!=b)

37. What are the user defined data types? � Structure � Union � Class � Enumeration

Page 112: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

112 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

38. What are the derived data types? � Array � Function � Pointer � Reference

39. What is pointer? � A pointer is a variable that holds a memory address. � Pointer provide the means through the memory locations of a variable can be

directly accessed. � Every byte in the computer memory has an address. � Address of(&) operator and the value at operators are used to declare pointer

variables. Ex: int *a; int &b; 40. What are the operators used to related to pointers variable?

i) *(Value at operator) is used to take value of the variable. ii) &( Address of) operator is used to take address of thee variable.

41. How to initialize a pointer variable? (Or) What is pointer variable? How to declare it? � Pointer variable can store the address of other variables. But address stored in

pointer variables are not of the same data type as this pointer variable is pointing to. � Ex: int *a,b=10;

a=&b; // initialize a pointer variable. 42. What is variable?

� Variables are user defined named entities of memory locations that can store data. � The name assigned to a data field that can assume any of a given values is defined as

the variable. � Ex: int a,b;

43. How to declare a variable? � Variables are allocated memory to store data. � Compiler allocates memory, based on the data type of the variable. � Hence variables must be declared before they are used. � Syntax:

� Ex: int a,b;

44. How to initialize a variable? � Variables are initialized to a specific value at the time of declaration. � Initialization is done only once. � Ex: int a=10;

45. How many words are there for datatype? What they are? � There are nine words for data types in C++. � They are char, int, double, float, void, short, signed, long and unsigned.

The value stored in the variable x is 7 as float is converted to the compiler does this conversion automatically.

Datatype identifier;

Page 113: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

113 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

46. What is meant by garbage? Auto variables not initialized with appropriate values based on their data type. These variables get undefined values known as garbage.

47. What are the data types? � Data types are the kind of data that variable hold in programming language. � The ability to divide data into different types in C++ enables ne to work with

complex objects. � Data types can be broadly classified into the following three categories.

o User Defined Data type o Built in Data type o Derived Data type

48. State the reason for grouping the data into different categories? Data is grouped into different categories for the following two reasons. � The compiler may be the proper internal representation for each data type. � The programmer designing the programs may use appropriate operators for each type.

49. What is meant by built data types?(Or) write notes on built in data types? Built in data types are also called as Fundamental or Basic data types. They are predefined in the compiler. Integral, Float and void are the three fundamental data types. Integral type is further divided into int,char. int is the integer data type. int cannot hold fractional values. Char is character data type that can hold both the character data and integer data.

50. If a=5,b=5 then a=a+b++; What is the value of ‘a’? a=a+b++ a=5+5++ a=5+5 a=10

51. If x=10, f=20 then c=x++ + ++f; What is the value of ‘c’? c=x++ + ++f c=10++ + ++20 c=10+21 c=31

52. fun=1,sim=2 then final=--fun+++sim-fun--; What is the value of final? final==--fun+++sim-fun-- = --1 + ++2-1-- =0+3-0 =3-0 final=3

Page 114: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

114 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

53. Evaluate x+y*z<e/f x y z e f

54. What will be the value of the following expression. (num1+num2-num3)/5*2<(num%10) where num1=99,num2=20,num3=10 = (num1+num2-num3)/5*2 < (num1%10) = (99+20-10)/5*2< (99%10) = (119-10)/10 < 9 = 109/10 < 9 = 10 < 9 = 0 (False)

55. Evaluate 5<4 && 8+9 5 4 8 9 0 17 0 ( False)

56. Evaluate the following where a=5,b=6,c=7 i) a+=b*c

a+=b*c a=a+b*c a=5+6*7 a=5+42 a=47

* /

+

<

< +

&&

Page 115: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

115 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

ii) c*=a+a/b c*=a+b/2 c=c*a+a/b c=(7*5)+5/6 c=35+0.8 c=35.8

iii) b+=(a%2)*c b+=(a%2)*c b=b+(a%2)*c b=6+(5%2)*7 b=6+1*7 b=6+7 b=13

57. Determine the order of evaluation of the following: 1. 1+pow(3,2)*2

1 3 2 2 9 18 19

2. a||b&&C

a b c

POW

*

+

&&

||

Page 116: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

116 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

3. a<b&&c||d>a a b c d a

4. (a+b)/(a/b) a b a b

5. (b*b)-4*a*c b b 4 a c

< >

&&

||

+ -

/

* *

*

-

Page 117: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

117 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

6. (c>=50)||(!flag)&&(b+5==70) c 50 flag b 5 70

58. Evaluate the following: Assume a=5,b=3,d=1.5, c is a integer and f is float.

1. f=a+b/a f=a+b/a =5+3/5 =5+0.6 f=5.6

2. c=d*a+b c=d*a+b = 1.5*5+3 =7.5+3 =10.5 because C is a integer type.

3. x=a++ *d+a x=a++*d+a =5++*1.5+5 =5*1.5+5 =7.5*5 if x is integer than value will be x=12.

4. y=a-b++*--b y=a-b++*--b =5-3++*--3 =5-3++*2 =5-3*2 =5-6

+

==

>= !

&&

||

y=-1

c=10

x=12.5

Page 118: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

118 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

5. (x>=y)||(!(z==y)&&(z<x)) where x=10,y=5,z=11(all are integers) x=10,y=10,z=10 x=9,y=10,z=2

1. x=10,y=5,z=11 (x>=y)||(!(z==y)&&(z<x)) (10>=5)||(!(11==5)&&(11<10))

=(1)||(!(0)&&(0)) =(1)||(1)&&(0) =1||0 = 1 (True)

2. x=10,y=5,z=11 (x>=y)||(!(z==y)&&(z<x)) =(10>=10)||(!(10==10)&&(10<10) =1||!(1)&&0 =1||0&&0 =1||0 =1 (True)

3. x=9,y=10,z=2 =(9>=10)||(!(2==10)&&(2<9) =0||!(0)&&1 =0||1&&1 =0||1 =1 (True)

59. Write the C++ equivalent expression using the conditional operator where. F=0.5 if x=30, otherwise f=5 Fn=0.9 if x>60, otherwise 0.7 Ans: f =(x==30)?0.5:5; fn=(x>=60)?0.9:0.7;

60. Write a declarative statement to declare name as a pointer variable that the address pointing to character data type. char *name; char n[20]; name=&n;

61. What are the operator or actions performed by C++ compiler using address of (&) operator? The C++ compiler performs the following operations/actions.

� Reserves space in the memory to hold the integer value. � Associations the variable name with a memory location. � Stores the value at this location in the memory.

Page 119: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

119 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

Important Questions and Answers 1. What is control structures?

� Program statements that cause jump of control from one part of program to another are called control structures.

� The two major categories of control structures are o Decision making statement (Or) Selection Statement o Looping Statement

2. Write notes on assignment statement? = is the simple assignment operator. An assignment statement assign value on the right hand side of an expression to the variable on the left hand side of the assignment operator. Ex: a=5; a=b+c;

3. Define If….Else statement? If…..else statement which chooses between two alternatives, executes the chosen block based on the condition. The Syntax is as follows

4. What is switch statement? � Switch is a multiple branching statement where based on a condition, the control is

transferred to one of the many possible points. � Include break in action block, in order to exit from switch statement.

CHAPTER-3: Basic Statements

If(condition)

{

action block1;

}

else

{

action block2;

}

switch(expression)

{

case 1: action block-1;

break;

case 2: action block-2;

break;

case 3: action block-3;

break;

default: action block-4;

}

Page 120: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

120 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

5. Define Nested…if statement? � The statement sequence of if or else may contain another if statements ie., if….else

statements can be nested within one another. � In an nested if……….else statement each else matches with the nearest un matched

preceding if. The syntax is as follows

6. What is loop?

� Loops execute a set of instructions repeatedly for a certain number of times. There are three types of loops are available in C++. They are 1. For loop 2. While loop 3. Do…while loop

7. What is for( ) loop? � for loop is an entry controlled loop. � for loop is used when an action is to be repeated for a predetermined number of

times. � for loop has three segments.

o Initial value o Condition o Increment/decrement

The syntax is

If(condition-1)

If(condition-2)

{

action block-1;

}

else

{

action block-2;

}

else

{

action block-3;

}

for( initial value; condition; increment/decrement) { action block; }

Page 121: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

121 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

8. What is while( ) loop? � While loop is a entry-check loop. � The body of the while loop will be executed only if the test expression results true

placed in the while statement. � The control exits the loop once the test expression is evaluated to false.

Syntax:

9. What is Do….While( ) Loop? � do…..while is called as exit check loop. � As the condition(text expression) marks the last statements of the body of the loop.

Syntax:

10. Write the General formats of If and If…Else Statements? If Statement: if……..else statement

11. Write the general syntax for switch statement.

while(condition))))

{ action block ; }

do { action block ; } while(condition);

if(condition)

{

action block;

}

if(condition)

{

action block1;

}

else

{

action block2;

}

switch(expression)

{

case 1: action block-1;

break;

case 2: action block-2;

break;

case 3: action block-3;

break;

default: action block-4;

}

Page 122: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

122 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

12. Write the general syntax for nested…..if statement.

13. What are the difference between continue and break statement? Break Continue

1. Break statement would exit the current loop only.

2. Break statement accomplishes jump from the current loop.

1. The continue statement forces the next iteration of the loop to take place, skipping any code following the continue statement in the loop body.

14. What the rules for the formation of nested loop? There are two rules for the formation of nested loops. 1. An outer loop and inner loop cannot have the same control variable, as it will

lead to logical errors. 2. The inner loop must be completely nested inside the body of the outer loop.

15. What are important sections of C++ program? � C++ program has primarily three sections. They are

o Include files o Declaration of variable, data type, user defined functions. o Main( ) functions.

Extra Questions and Answers 16. What are the different statements in C++?(Or)What are the basic statements in C++?

Basic statements in C++ are constructed using tokens. The different statements are

o Input/Output o Declaration o Assignment o Control structure o Function call o Object message o Return

If(condition-1)

If(condition-2)

{

action block-1;

}

else

{

action block-2;

}

else

{

action block-3;

}

Page 123: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

123 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

17. What are the essential functions of any computer program? Input/Output statements such as

• Reading data • Processing data • Displaying information

are the essential functions of any computer program. 18. What are the methods for assigning data to a variable? (Or) How many methods are

used to assign data to variable? � There are two methods for assigning data to the variable. They are

o By using assignment statement o Read data during the runtime of a program by using the object cin.

19. What is cin? (Or) What are the uses of cin object? � Data is read from the keyboard during run time by using the object cin. � cin is a predefined object that corresponds to a standard input stream. � Input stream represents the flow of data from the standard input device the keyboard � The declarations for the objects are available in a header file called as istream.h

20. What is cout? (Or) What are the uses of cout object? � cout is a predefined object of standard output stream. � The standard output stream normally flows to the screen display-although it can be

redirected to several output devices. � The declarations for the object cout is available in a header file called ostream.h

21. What is iostream? (Or) What is the use of #include<iostream.h> � iostream.h file comprises the combined properties of istream.h and ostream.h � #include<iostream.h> is a typical preprocessor directive that instructs the compiler

to include the header file iostream.h in order to use cin/cout objects one has to include iostream.h in the program.

22. Difference between extraction and insertion operator? Extraction Operator Insertion Operator

1. >> is the extraction operator. 2. It takes the value from the stream

object to its left and places it in the variable to its right.

3. Ex: cin>>a;

1. << is the insertion operator. 2. It directs the contents of the variable

to its right to the objects to its left.

3. Ex: cout<<a; 23. What is the use of declaration statements?

� Variables used in the declaration statements need to be declared and defined before they are used in a program.

� Declaration of variable introduces a variable’s name and its associated data type. � Declaration statement are used to declare user defined data type identifiers, function

headers, pointer variables and the like.

Page 124: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

124 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

24. What is the definition statement? � When a declaration sets aside memory for the variable it is called as definition. � For example consider the declaration statement

int num; this statement is called as definition statement because memory is set aside to store data. Now consider the following snippet. int num; // declares and defines as integer variable. num=5; // The data 5 is stored

25. What does the C++ compiler perform during assignment operation? During assignment operator, C++ compiler converts the data type on the right hand side of the expression to the data type of the variable on the left hand side of the expression.

26. Draw the flow chart for selection and loop statement? Selection: Loop:

Entry

Entry True False

True False

27. What are the types of control structures? The two major categories of control structures are

� Decision making statement (Or) Selection Statement � Looping Statement

28. What is selection statement? � In a program a decision causes a one time jump to a different part of a program. � Decisions in C++ are made in several ways. � Most important with

o If….else statement which chooses between two alternatives. o Switch creates branches for multiple alternatives sections of code, depending

on the value of a single variable.

condition

Action 1 Action 2

Action 3

condition Action 1

Action 2

Page 125: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

125 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

29. Define if statements? � If statements is the simplest of all the decision statements. � It is implemented in two forms.

o Simple if statement o If……else statement.

30. What are the loops in C++? There are three kinds of loops in C++. They are

� For loop � While loop � Do…..while loop

For and while loops are called Entry-check loops Do……while loop is a exit-check loop

31. What are the difference between while and do…while loop? While loop do……while loop

1. While loop is a entry check loop.

2. The body of the while loop will be executed only if the test expression results true placed in the while statement.

1. do……..while loop is exit-check loop.

2. The body of the do….while loop will be executed at least once whether the condition true or false.

32. What is nested loop? � Loop may contain another loop. � Loop statement can be nested within one another loop statement is known as nested

loop. 33. Write notes on looping block? (Or) What is looping block?

A looping block consists of two segments. They are o Body of the loop o The control statements

The control statement checks the condition based on which directs the control back to the body of the loop to execute the segment repeatedly.

34. What are the points do you infer about the loop execution? Loops are unconditionally executed at least once, if the condition is placed at the end of the body of the loop.

Based on the position of the condition, the loops are classified into two types. o Entry control loop( for, while) o Exit check loop( do….while)

35. In what manner the looping process would work? A looping process would work in the following manner. 1. Initializes the condition variable. 2. Executes the segment of the body. 3. Increments the value of the condition variable as required.

Page 126: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

126 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

4. Tests the condition variable in the form of a relational expressions. 5. Based on the value of the relational expression the control is either transferred to

the beginning of the block, or it quits the loop. 36. Define source code and object code?

Source Code: A program written in high level language is called as the source code. Object Code (Or) Object File:

The source code has to be converted to machine readable code. The machine readable from of a program is called as object file. Compiler creates object files from the source file.

37. What is compiler? (Or) What is the use of compiler? Compilers are translator programs that create a machine readable program from the source code.

Compiler check for the grammar of language(syntax). 38. Illustrate how the continue statement works in various loops?

For loop: do……while loop while loop: for( ; ;) do while( ) { { { …………. ………… …………. …………. ………… …………. Continue; continue; continue; …………. ………… …………. …………. ………… …………. } } while( ); }

Important Questions and Answers 1. What is function?

Functions are building blocks of C++ program. Functions are also executable segments in a programs. The starting point for the execution of a program is main( ).

2. What are the uses of function? � Reduce the size of the program. � Induce reusability of code. � Save the memory space.

3. Define return statement? (Or) What is the use of return statement? � Return statement mark the end of the function. � Return statement transfer control to the statement after call statement.

CHAPTER-4: Functions

Page 127: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

127 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

4. What is function prototype? Functions should be declared before they are used in a program. Declaration of function is made through a function prototype. They general syntax of a function prototype is Ex: void fun(char); int add(int a, int b);

5. Write the general syntax of function prototype?

6. What are the uses of function prototype? � The main purpose of function is to help the compiler to check the data requirement

of the functions. � The function prototype provides the following information to the compiler.

o Number and type of arguments. o The type of return values

7. What is parameters? (Or) What is arguments? � The call statements communications with the function through arguments or

parameters. � Parameters are the channels through which data flows from the call statement to the

function and vice versa. 8. What are the difference between call by value and call by Reference?

Call by value Call by reference 1. In call by value method, any change

made in the formal parameter is not reflected back to the actual parameter.

2. In call by value method formal and actual parameters point to the different storage area.

1. In call by reference method, any change made in the formal parameter is reflected in the actual parameter.

2. In call by reference method formal and actual parameter point to the same storage area.

9. What is inline function? An inline function looks like a normal function in the source program file but inserts the function’s code directly into the calling program.

Inline functions executes faster but require more memory space. 10. What is scope? And its types?

Scope refers to the accessibility of a variable. There are four types of scopes in C++. They are

o Local Scope o Function Scope o File Scope o Class Scope

<Data type> <function identifier> (arguments);

<Data type> <function identifier> (arguments);

Page 128: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

128 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

11. Define function scope? � The scope of variables declared with in a function is extended to the function block,

and all sub blocks there in. � The life time of a function scope variable is the life time of the function block.

12. Define file scope? � A variable declared above all blocks and functions( precisely above main( ) ) has

the scope of a file. � The scope of a file scope variable is the entire program. � The life time of a file scope variable is the life time of program.

Extra Questions and Answers 13. What is call by value method?

In call by value method, any change made in the formal parameter is not reflected back to the actual parameter.

14. What is call by reference method? In call by reference method, any change made in the formal parameter is reflected in the actual parameter.

15. Write notes on scope resolution operator? : : is called scope resolution operator. The scope operator reveals the hidden scope of a variable. It is used to refer variables declared at file level. This is helpful only under situations where the local and file scope variables have the same name.

16. How are the functions are invoked? (Or) What are the methods used in function? In two ways the functions are invoked in C++, They are

o Call by value o Cal by reference

17. What should be noted if one can assign default values to the formal parameters of a function prototype? (Or) Write notes on default arguments(OR) default values?

� The default value is given in the form of variable initialization. � The default arguments facilitate the function call statements with partial or no

arguments. � The default values can be included in the function prototype form right to left i.e.,

we cannot have a default value for an arguments in between the arguments. 18. Write notes on returning values in function?

The functions that return no value is declared as void. The data type of a function is treated as int , if no data type is explicitly mentioned. For example: int add (int a, int b); add(int a, int b); In both prototypes, the return value is int. Because by default the return value of a function in C++ is of type int.

Page 129: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

129 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

19. How to call function? A function can be called or invoked from another function by using its name.

The function name may include a set of actual parameters, enclosed in parentheses separated by commas.

Important Questions and Answers 1. What is array?

An array in C++ is a derived data type that can hold several values of the same type. [Or]

An array is collection of variables of the same type that are referenced by a common name.

Arrays are of two types: o One dimensional array Ex: int a[5]; o Multi dimensional array Ex: int a[5][5];

2. What is one dimensional array? � One dimensional array is comprising of finite homogenous elements. � Ex: int a[5];

3. What is two-dimensional array? � Two-dimensional array is comprising of elements of which is itself a one-

dimensional array. � Ex: int a[5][5];

4. How to declare a One-Dimensional Array? The general syntax of one-dimensional array is as follows Ex: int a[5];

5. How to declare the 2D-Array? The general syntax of two-dimensional array is as follows

Ex: int a[5][5]; 6. What is String? (Or) What are literals? (Or) What is array of characters?

Strings are otherwise called as literals, Which are treated as single dimensional array of characters.

The declaration of string is same as numeric array. For example char name[ ]=“Computer”;

Datatype array_id [size];

Datatype array_id [row][column];

CHAPTER-5: Arrays

Page 130: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

130 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

7. Define Sorting? Sorting is the process of rearrange the data in a given array either in ascending or descending order.

8. What is Array of string? � An array of strings is a two-dimensional character array. � The size of first index (rows) determines the number of strings. � The size of second index (columns) determines maximum length of each string.

Ex: char name[2][7] ={“Sunday”, “Monday”}; 9. What is matrix?

A matrix is a set of mn numbers arranged in the form of a rectangular array of m rows and n columns.

Matrix can be represented through 2-D arrays. 10. Define- Write( ) function? (Or) What are the two parameters required for write

function? Write( ) is a member function of standard output stream i.e., ostream.h All member functions of a class, should be accessed through an object/instance of class.

The two parameters required for write( ) function are identifier string character and no.of. characters to be displayed.

Ex: cout.write(“name”,2); 11. Define Strlen( ).

� It stands for string length. � It returns the number of characters stored in the array.

Syntax: strlen(char*); Ex: strlen(“computer”); it returns 8.

12. Define Strcpy( ). � It stands for string copy. � It is used to copying the content of source string to target string.

Syntax: Strcpy(char*,char*); Ex:strcpy(name,petname);

13. Define Strcmp( ). � It stands for string compare. � It is used to compare two strings. � If two string are equal it return the value 0. � If string1 is greater than string2 it return the value >0. � If string2 greater than string1 it return the value <0.

The Syntax is strcmp(char*char*); Example: Strcmp(“Abc”,”Abc”); �0 Strcmp(“Abc”,”abc”); �-1 Strcmp(“abc”,”Abc”); �1

Page 131: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

131 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

14. How are the memory representation of 2D-array? A 2-D array is stored in sequential memory blocks. The elements are stored either 1. Row-wise manner( This method is called as row-major order) 2. Column-wise manner( This method is called as column-major order) int sales[2][3]; will be stored as follows

In row-major order In Column-major order

1st Row 1st Column

2nd Column

2nd Row

3rd Column

15. Write the general formats of gets( ) and getline( ) function?

� To treat spaces as part of sting literal, than one has to use gets( ) or getline( ) function.

� gets( ) is defined in <stdio.h> � getline( ) is defined in iostream.h and istream.h

Syntax for gets ( ): gets( char array identifier) or gets(char*); Ex: gets(“welcome”); Syntax for getline( ): cin.getline(char*, no.of characters, delimiter); Ex: cin.getline(pincode,7,’#’);

Extra Questions and Answers 16. Define string.h?

String manipulations are defined in string.h String manipulations are

o Strlen( ) Strcpy( ) o Strcmp( ) Strrev( ) o Strcat( )

17. What are the rules to be followed while using array subscripts? � Array subscripts should be positive number should not be negative. � Array subscripts always commences from zero. � Array subscripts should be integer value, should not be floating value.

Ex: int a[5]; is valid array. int a[-4], int a[5.5] are invalid.

18. How the size of 2-D array is calculated? The size of 2-D array is calculated as follows

Ex: int num[2][5]; the size will calculated as follows =10X2( 2 bytes is required for integer) =20 bytes

0,0

0,1

0,2

1,0

1,1

1,2

0,0

0,1

0,2

1,0

1,1

1,2

Number of elements * memory requirement for one elements

Page 132: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

132 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

19. How arrays can be passed on as arguments to function? � Arrays can be passed on as arguments to function. � The actual parameters is passed only by the identifiers ignoring dimension. � Array parameters by default behave like a reference parameter, as the array

identifier unlike other identifiers represents the base address of the array. 20. What are the data types can be used in 2D array? (Or) How the dimensions of 2D

array can be indicated? The dimensions (rows/columns) of an array can be indicated 1. Using integer constants 2. Using const identifier of integer or ordinal 3. Using char constant 4. Using enum identifier

Important Questions and Answers 1. What is class and give example?

The most important feature of C++ is the class. A class is a new way of creating and implementation a user defined data type. Classes provide a method for packing together data of different types. A class is a way to bind data and its associated functions together. Example: class student { char name[30]; int rno,m1,m2, total; };

2. What are the two types of a class specification? � A class specification has two parts

o Class declaration o Class function definition

3. Write the general format of Class?

CHAPTER-6: Classes and Objects

class class_name { private: variable declaration; function declaration; protected: variable declaration; function declaration; public: variable declaration; function declaration; };

Page 133: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

133 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

4. What is encapsulation? The binding of data and functions together into a single entity is called as encapsulation.

5. What is data hiding? � Data hiding is the key features of OOPS. � The members and functions declared under private are not accessible by outside the

class, this is called as Data hiding. 6. What is Data Abstraction?

� Instruments allowing only selected access of components to objects and to members of other classes is called as data abstraction.

� Data abstraction is achieved through data hiding. 7. What are the two methods to create the objects?

� In C++ the class variables are known as objects. � The declaration of an object is similar to that of a variable of any basic type.

1. Student s; This statement may be read as s is an instance or object of the class student.

2. Objects can also be created by placing their names immediately after brace of the class declaration. Ex: class student { private: protected: public: } S; //Here S is an object

8. What are the three access specifiers in a class? The class body has three access specifiers, They are

o Private: The members that have been declared as private can be accessed only from within the class.

o Protected: The members that have been declared as protected, can be accessed from the class and the members of the inherited class

o Public: The members that have been declared as public can be accessed from outside the class also.

9. Define Static Data members? The static variable:

� Is initialized to zero, only when the first object of its class is created. No other initialization is permitted.

� Only one copy of the member variable is created(as part of the common pool) and is shared by all the other objects of its class type.

� Its scope or visibility is within the class but its lifetime is the lifetime of the program 10. What does a class comprise?

A class comprises of data members and member functions.

Page 134: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

134 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

11. What is array of objects? We can create group of objects of same class at same time. It is called as Array of objects. Ex: class add { :::::::::::

}s[5]; array of objects 12. How to accessing the class members?

The members of a class are accessed using the dot operator. For example, the call statement to the function execute( ) of the class student may be given as stud . execute( ); Member function Dot Operator

Object name 13. What are the special characteristics of Member function? (Or) List any four

characteristics of member function used in program development � Several different class can use the same function name. The membership label will

resolve their scope. � Member function can access the private data of class. A non member function

cannot do so. � A member function can call another member function directly without the dot

operator is called nesting of member function. � The member functions can receive the arguments of a valid C++ data type. Objects

can also be passed as arguments. � The return type of a member function can be of object data type. � Member functions can be of static type.

14. How are the memory allocation of objects? � The member functions are created and placed in the memory space only when they

are defined as a part of the class specification. � All the objects belonging to that class use the same member function. � No separate space is allocated for member function when the objects are created. � Memory space is allocated for the member variable separately for each object. � Separate memory allocation for objects are essential because the member variables

will hold different data values for different objects. 15. What is Data members and Member function?

Class comprises of members. Members are classified as data members and member functions.

Data Members Member function 1. Data members are the data variable

that represent the features or properties of a class.

2. Data members are also called as attributes.

1. Member function are the functions that perform specific task in a class.

2. Member functions are also called as methods.

Page 135: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

135 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

16. What is the use of membership label? The membership label class_name:: tell the compiler that the function function_name belongs to the class class_name. Ex: void add :: display( ); Member function Scope resolution operator Class Name Data type of the member fucntion Here add:: is class label

17. What is the nesting of member function? A member function can call another member function directly without using the dot operator is called nesting of member function.

18. How will you define methods of a class? In two ways we can define methods of a class

o Inside the class declaration o Outside the class declaration

Inside the class declaration: The member functions defined within the class behave like inline function. Ex: class add { int a,b; public: add( ) { a=0; b=0; } void display( ) { cout<<”computer”; } }; Here the member function display( ) is declared and defined within the class add. Outside the class declaration: Member function defined outside the class has the prototype as Type classname::function name( );

Page 136: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

136 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

Ex: class add { int a,b; public: void display( ); }; void add:: display( ) { cout<<”Computer”; } Here the member function display( ) is declared inside the class and defined outside the class add.

19. Write notes on class declaration?

The keyword class specifies user defined data type class name. The body of a class enclosed within braces and is terminated by a semicolon. The class body contains the declaration of variable and functions. The class body has three access specifiers (visibility labels) viz., private, protected, public. Specifying private visibility label is optional. By default the memerbs will be treated as

private if visibility label is not mentioned. The members that have been declared as private can be accessed only from within the

class. The members that have been declared as protected, can be accessed from the class and the

members of the inherited class. The members that have been declared as public can be accessed from outside the class

also.

class class_name

{

private:

variable declaration;

function declaration;

protected:

variable declaration;

function declaration;

public:

variable declaration;

function declaration;

};

Page 137: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

137 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

Important Questions and Answers 1. What is function overloading?

The ability of the function to process the message or data in more than one form is called as function over loading. Ex: float area( float a);

float area( float a, float b, float c);

float area( float a, float b);

2. What is operator overloading? � The term operator overloading, refers to giving additional functionality to the

normal C++ operators like +,++,-,--,+=,-=,*,<,>. [Or]

� The mechanism of giving special meaning to an operator is called as operator overloading.

3. How are functions are invoked in function overloading? The compiler adopts BEST MATCH strategy. As per this strategy, the compiler will

� Look for the exact match of a function prototype with that of a function call statement.

� In case an exact match is not available, it looks for the next nearest match. That is, the compiler promote integral data promotions and then match the call statement with function prototype.

4. What are the rules for function overloading? � Each overloaded function must differ either by the number of its formal parameters

or their data types. � The return type of overloaded functions may or may not be the same data type. � The default arguments of overloaded functions are not considered by the C++

compiler as part of the parameter list. � Do not use the same function name for two unrelated functions.

5. Mention any two rules for operator overloading? � Only existing operators can be overloaded. New operators cannot be created. � The overloaded operator must have at least one operand of user defined type.

6. Which operators cannot be overload? The following operators cannot be overloaded. They are

: : Scope resolution operator . dot operator ?: conditional operator Sizeof( ) operator

CHAPTER-7: Polymorphism

Page 138: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

138 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

7. List out the steps involved to define an overloaded an operator? How the overload process involved?

Create a class that defines the data type that is to be used in the overloading operations.

Declare the operator function operator( ) in the public part of the class. Define the operator function to implement the required operations.

Extra Questions and Answers 8. What is overloading?

� Overloading means a name having two or more distinct meanings. � There are two types of overloading in C++. They are

o Function overloading o Operator overloading

9. How is polymorphism is achieved in C++? Polymorphism is achieved through overloading. Overloading may be

Function overloading Operator overloading

10. Write notes on integral promotion? Integral promotion are purely compiler oriented by and large integral promotions are as follows.

� Char data type can be converted to integer/float/double. � int data type can be converted to char/double/float � float data type can be converted to integer/double/char � double data type can be converted to float/integer

11. What are the operators can be overloaded? The following operators can be overloaded.

o Addition operator(+) o Subtraction operator(-) o Multiplication operator(*) o Increment operator(++) o Decrement operator(--) o Less than operator(<) o Greater than operator(>) o Addition equal to operator(+=)

12. What are the advantages of operator overloading? (Or) What does operator overloading provides? New function definitions for basic C++ operators like +,*,-,++,--,>,<,+= and the like. The following operators cannot be overloaded.

o : : Scope resolution operator o . dot operator o ? conditional operator o Sizeof( ) operator

The overloaded function definitions are permitted for user defined data type. The operator functions must be either member functions or friend functions. The new definition that is provided to an operator does not overrule the original definition of the operator.

Page 139: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

139 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

Important Questions and Answers 1. What are the functions of constructor?

The constructor function initializes the class objects. The memory space is allocated to an object.

2. In which situation a copy constructor is execute? (Or) How copy constructor is executed? (Or) When does a copy constructor is executed?

A copy constructor is executed: 1. When an object is passed as parameter to any of the member functions.

void add::putdata(add x); 2. When an member function return an object.

add getdata( ): 3. When an object is passed by reference to constructor.

add a;b(a); 3. What are the rules for constructor definition and usage?

The same of the constructor must be same as that of the class. A constructor can have parameter list. The constructor function can be overloaded. The compiler generates a constructor, in the absence of a user defined constructor. The constructor is executed automatically. It declared under the public part.

4. What are the rules for destructor definition and usage? The destructor has that same name as that of class prefixed by the tilde character(~). The destructor cannot have parameter list. It has no return type. Destructor cannot be overloaded i.e., there can be only one destructor in a class. In the absence of user defined destructor, it is generated by the compiler. The destructor is executed automatically when the control reaches the end of class scope.

It is declared under the public part. 5. What are the difference between constructor and destructor?

Constructor Destructor 1. The functions of a constructor is

initialized the class object. 2. Constructor is executed when an

object is created. 3. Constructor can be overloaded. 4. A class can have multiple constructor.

1. The function of a destructor is removes the memory of an object.

2. Destructor is executed when an object is destroyed.

3. Destructor cannot be overloaded. 4. A class can have only one destructor.

CHAPTER-8: Constructor and Destructor

Page 140: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

140 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

Extra Questions and Answers 6. What is constructor?

� When an instance of a class comes into scope, a special function called the constructor gets executed.

� The constructor function initializes the class object. � Constructor have the same name as the class name.

Example:

7. What are the types of constructor? � Non parameterized constructor. � Parameterized constructor. � Copy constructor.

8. What is default constructor? � The constructor add ( ) is a constructor without parameter( non parameterized). � It is default constructor. � Default constructor are referred to compiler generated constructor i.e., constructor

are defined by the computers in the absence of user defined constructor. � A non parameterized constructor is executed when an object without parameter is

declared. 9. What is destructor?

� A destructor is a function that removes the memory of an object which was allocated by the constructor at the time of creating a object.

� It carries the same name as the class name, but with a tiled (~) as prefix. Ex:

class simple

{

…………….

…………….

Public:

Simple ( )

{

………

..…….

}

};

class simple

{

…………….

Public:

~simple ( )

{

……………

}

};

Page 141: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

141 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

10. What are the similarities between constructor and destructor? Both are declared under public part. Both the function return nothing. They are not associated with any data type. Both has the same name as that of the class.

Important Questions and Answers 1. What is Inheritance?

� Inheritance is the process of creating new classes called derived class, from the existing or base classes.

� The derived class inherits all the properties of the base class. � Derived class is a power packed class. � Inheritance is the most powerful feature of an object oriented programming

language. 2. What are the advantages of Inheritance?

� Reusability of code. � Code sharing � Consistency of interface.

3. What are the various types of Inheritance? There are 5 types of inheritance in C++. They are

� Single inheritance � Multiple inheritance � Multilevel inheritance � Hybrid inheritance � Hierarchical inheritance

4. Write the general format of derived class? The derived class should be indicated as: Example:

CHAPTER-9: Inheritance

Class der_name : visibility mode base class-id { Data members of the derived_class; Function members of the derived_class; };

Class sub : public add { int a,b; public: sub( ); plus( ): };

Page 142: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

142 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

5. What is accessibility? An important feature in inheritance is to know as to when a member of a base class can be used by the objects or the members of the derived class. This is called accessibility.

6. What are the three access speicifiers used to inherit a derived class? 1. Private 2. Protected 3. Public

7. What is Abstract Class? Classes used only for deriving other classes are called as abstract class. Objects for these classes are not declared.

Extra Questions and Answers 8. What is meant by base class?

A base class is a class from which other classes are derived. Base class is also called as main class or parent class. A derived class can inherit members of a base class.

9. What is derived class? � Inheritance is the process of creating new classes from an existing class. � Newly created classes are called as derived class. � Derived class is also called as sub class or child class.

10. What are the points should be observed while defining derived class? While defining a derived class the following points should be observed.

o The keyword class has to be used. o The name of the derived class is to be given after the keyword class. o A single colon o The type of derivation, namely private, protected and public. o The name of the base class or parent class. o The remainder of the derived class definition.

11. How do the members of a class inherited with private visibility mode? When a base class is inherited with private visibility mode the public and protected members of the base class become private members of the derived class.

12. How do the members of a class inherited with protected visibility mode? When a base class is inherited with protected visibility mode the protected and public members of the base class become protected members of the derived class.

13. How do the members of a class inherited with public visibility mode? When a base class is inherited with public visibility mode

The protected members of the base class will be inherited as protected members of the derived class.

and the public members of the base class will be inherited as public memerbs of the derived class.

Page 143: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

143 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

Important Questions and Answers 1. What is ATM?

ATM stands for Automatic Teller machine. ATM enable withdrawal of money from the accounts in a particular bank anytime and anywhere.

This helps the user in emergency situations where money is needed during the nights and holidays.

2. What is E-Banking? � E-banking stands for Electronic banking. � E-banking permits banking from the comfort of the home by using internet facilities.

It has truly improved the reach and services of banks. � Ex: ATM

3. What is Memo frame? Easy interaction with other people through touch screen, scanner and microphone facilities.

4. What is E-Shopping? � We can purchase any product, any brand, any quantity from anywhere through

e-shopping. � The pictures and other details of that can be purchased are available on the website

of the shop. � You have to select and order. Advance payments for these items is assured by

various methods. � Credit cards and prior registration with the shop are the popular methods. � The items purchased will be delivered at your home.

5. What is learning? E-learning that enables online educational programs leading to degrees and certifications.

E-learning stands for Electronic Learning. E-learning packages are

o CBT ( Computer Based Tutorial) o WBT (Web Based Tutorial)

6. What is emotion containers? � They are small compartments with a screen, speaker and scent to derive emotional

comfort. � This can prevent people from acquiring bad habits.

Extra Questions and Answers

7. What are the technical elements we need to reach out benefits of IT to the common man? � To reach out the benefits of IT to the common man we need at least three technical

elements. o Connectivity[computer network and internet facility] o Affordable computers or other similar devices . o Software

CHAPTER-10: Impact of Computers on Society

Page 144: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

144 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

8. What is the use of personal archives? � They store personal details like family photographs and personal treasures. � In addition it enable connectivity to other people.

9. How are the computers used in healthcare? Computers are used in many areas of healthcare including.

� Hospital management systems. � Patient tracking systems. � Exchange of diagnostic records between healthcare units. � Tracking and monitoring communicable diseases. � Decision support systems with highly advanced computing techniques.

10. How the computers are used in education? Computers are used in many areas of education including.

Buying and browsing the latest edition of books by both local and foreign authors educational CDROMS.

Computer Based Tutorial (CBT). Spreading information about schools, colleges university and course offered, admission procedures, accommodation facilities, scholarships, educational loans, career guidance.

E-learning that enables online educational programs leading to degrees and certifications.

11. How the computer are used in Entertainment? � Computers contribute to entertainment also. � You can update your knowledge in fine arts like painting, music, dance, yoga, games,

science, nature, latest news and events. � We can know more about various places of worship and places of internet for tourist.

12. Mention some of the areas where software has been developed in agriculture? Some of the areas where software has been developed in agriculture.

� Agricultural Finance and accounting � Alternative farming techniques � Animal Husbandry � Building and Irrigation � Chat with other agriculturists and scientist � Farmland Assessment � Fertilizer analysis � Finding links to farm resources, chat boards, classified advertisements and other

farm-related information. � Improving Cow Herds and increasing revenues � Land Management � Milk production � Use of satellite imagery to decide on the crops.

Page 145: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

145 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

Important Questions and Answers 1. What is ITES?

ITES stands for Information Technology Enabled Services. Information technology that helps in improving the quality of service to the users is called IT enabled service.

ITES greatly increases the employment opportunities. 2. What is e-Governance?

� E-Governance stands for Electronic Governance. � Computers help you to look at the government websites and the services provided by

them. � The various websites provided by the government give the details about the

departments, specific functions, special schemes, documents, contacts, links IAS intranet, site map, search, what’s new press releases, feedback.

� These websites are both in English and Tamil. 3. What is Call Centers?

A call center is sometimes defined as a telephone based shared services center for specific customer activities and are used for number of customer information transfer, advice, technical support and so on.

It operates to provide round the clock and year round service i.e., 24X365 service. 4. What is Data Management?

� Data Management is category of IT enabled services pertaining to collection, digitization and processing of data coming from various sources.

� Data Management is the key for effective and profitable use of IT in organization. 5. What is Medical Transcription?

� Medical Transcription is a permanent, legal document that formally states the result of a medical investigation.

� It facilities communication and supports the insurance claims. � There are three main steps involved in medical transcription. � Medical transcription is valid for legal purposes and making insurance claims.

6. What is Data Digitization? � Digitization refers to the conversion of non-digital material to digital form. � A wide variety of materials are diverse as maps, manuscripts, moving images and

sound may be digitized. 7. What are the benefits of digitization?

� Long term preservation of the document � Storage of important at document at one place � Easy to use and access to the information. � Quick and focused search of relevant information in terms of images and text. � Easy transfer of information in terms of images and text. � Easy transfer of information through CDROM internet.

CHAPTER-11: IT Enabled Services

Page 146: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

146 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

Extra Questions and Answers 8. Mention some of the IT Enabled services?

IT enabled services are: o E-governance o Call center o Data Management o Medical Transcription o Data Digitization o Website services

9. Mention some data management ITES (Or) name some Data Management? � ASCII format for upload to your data base. � Character recognition and processing � Customer reports � Data entry � Data entry front and edits � Document preparation � Forms are imaged and transferred to CDROM � Image capturing � Image Keying � Image storage and retrieval � Outcome studies � Statistical analysis

10. List out some of web based services? Components help us in accessing website services such as:

� Agriculture marketing network � Career guidance � Employment online � General provident fund � Results of various examinations

11. Name some organizations benefited by data management? Banking Government agencies Hospital Insurance Legal Manufacturing Municipalities Police department Public utilities Publishing Telecom Transportation

12. Mention some areas where the digital technology is used? (Or) List out some of application areas of the digital technology?

� Annual reports and price lit � Books � Data base archiving

Page 147: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

147 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

� Electronic catalogues & Brochures � Geographical information systems. � Movies, sounds and high quality image preservation � Product / service training manuals. � Research journals and conference papers

13. List out any two direct benefits of ITES? � ITES can improve the quality of the service either directly or indirectly.

Improved customer satisfaction better look and feel and improved database are some direct benefits.

Important Questions and Answers 1. What is computer crime?

A computer crime is any illegal activity using computer software data or access as the object, subject or instrument of the crime.

2. What is piracy? � Making and using duplicate hardware and software is called piracy.

3. Define computer ethics? Computer ethics is a set of rules determining more standards or what is considered as socially acceptable behaviors using computers.

4. List out some common computer crimes? Crimes related to money transfer on the internet Making long distance calls illegally using computers Illegal access to confidential files Stealing hardware Selling or misusing personal Hardware and software piracy Virus Cracking Theft of computer time

5. What is Virus? � A virus is a self-replicating program that can cause damage to data and files stored on

your computer. � These are programs written by programmers with great programming skills who are

motivated by the need for challenge or cause destruction. � 57000 known virus programs are in existence. � 6 new viruses are found each day.

6. What is Cracking? Cracking is the illegal access to the network or computer system Illegal use of special resources in the system is the key reason for cracking. The resources may be hardware, software files or system information.

CHAPTER-12: Computer Ethics

Page 148: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

148 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

7. What is Physical Security? Physical security refers to the protection of hardware, facilities, magnetic disks and other items that could be illegally accessed, stolen, damaged or destroyed. This is usually provided restricting the people who can access the resources.

8. What is Personal Security? Personal security refers to software setups that permit only authorized access to the system. User Ids and passwords are common tools for such purpose. Only those with a need to know have IDs and Password for access.

9. What is Personnel Security? Personnel security refers to protecting data and computer system against dishonesty or negligence of employees.

10. What is Theft of computer time? Idle time of computers in an organization is being stolen illegally. Some other software runs on an idle computer without the knowledge of the organization. This is called theft of computer time.

Extra Questions and Answers 11. What is ethics?

Generally speaking ethics is the set of rules for determining moral standards or what is considered as socially acceptable behaviors.

12. What are general guidelines on computer ethics? General guidelines on computer ethics are needed for:

� Protection of personal data � Computer crime � Cracking

13. What does book of Norbert Wiener contain about computer crime? Wiener’s book include:

� An account of the purpose of a human life. � Four principles of justice. � A powerful method for doing applied ethics. � Discussions of the fundamental questions of computer ethics. � Examples of key computer ethics topics.

14. Why we tend to pirate? We tend to pirate because:

We like free things Why pay for something when we can get it for free? Our thinking and actions are self-serving. If we have the opportunity to get away with something, benefit financially and minimal risk is involved the way in which we have been conditional by our capitalist society to do it.

15. What is the need for a password to log into computer systems? The need of password to log into a computer systems are:

� To product computer systems from cracking. � To product against unauthorized usage. � Password to log improves personal security. � Only those with a need can be given password to long onto the system.

Page 149: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

149 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

Question No: 101, 102: [Star Office Writer 1-5] 1. How to moving around the document?

To move the insertion point to anywhere in the document either the mouse or the keyboard can be used. The thick horizontal line in the page area is called end of document marker. The insertion point cannot be beyond this line.

To move the insertion point with the mouse, the mouse pointer is moved to the required spot and the mouse button is clicked. The insertion point jumps to that spot.

To move the insertion point with the keyboard the arrow keys and other combination can be used.

To Move Press 1. One character to the left 2. One character to the right 3. One word to the left 4. One word to the right 5. One cell to the left(in a table) 6. One cell to the right(in a table) 7. Up one line 8. Down one line 9. To end of a line 10. To the beginning of a line 11. Down one screen 12. Up one screen 13. To the end of the document 14. To the beginning of a document

Left Arrow Right Arrow Ctrl+ Left Arrow Ctrl+Right Arrow Shift+Tab Tab Up Arrow Down Arrow End Home Page Down Page Up Ctrl+End Ctrl+Home

2. What are the difference between moving text and copying text?

The selected text can be easily cut and pasted in the required location. 1. Moving the text:

1. The text to be moved to a new location is selected. 2. Edit����Cut is selected to cut the selected text. 3. Insertion point is moved to the place where the text is to be pasted. 4. Edit����Paste is selected paste the text in the new location.

2. Copying the text: 1. The text to be copied is selected. 2. Edit����Copy is selected. 3. The insertion point is selected where you the copy of the text should appear and

Edit����Paste is selected.

Ctrl+ C ���� To Copy

Ctrl+V ���� To Paste

Ctrl+ X ���� To Cut

Ctrl+V ���� To Paste

Page 150: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

150 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

3. How will you find and replace a given word in Star Office Writer? To Find and Replace Text 1. Choose Edit����Find & Replace. The Find &Replace dialog box appears. 2. In the Search for box, type the text that you want to find in your document. 3. In the Replace with box, enter the replacement word or phrase. 4. Click Find to start the search. 5. To replace the found instance of the text with what you entered in the Replace with box,

click Replace. To replace all instances of the text with what you entered in the replace with box, click Replace All.

6. To skip the found text and to continue the search, click Find. 7. Click Close when you have finished the search.

4. What are the various methods to select the text in a document? Once the text is selected, change can be made to that text. The text can be moved, copied and made as bold. The font colour of the text can also be changed.

For selecting the text the mouse or the keyboard can be used. 1. Selecting text with Mouse:

1. Insertion point is moved to the start of the text to be selected. 2. The left mouse button should be clicked, held down and dragged across the text to be

selected. 3. When the intended text is selected, the mouse button should be released. 4. To unselect the wrongly selected text a click should be made outside the selected text.

2. Selecting text with Keyboard: 1. Insertion point is moved to the start of the text to be selected. 2. The Shift key is pressed down and the movement keys are used to highlight the required text. 3. When the shift key is released, the text is selected.

3. Selection Shortcuts: Double Click on a word - To Select a word Shift+End, Click once next to the line - To Select the particular line Press Ctrl+A - To Select the entire document

Page 151: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

151 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

5. What are the formatting changes that can be made with respect to the fonts? In Star office writer offers a number of choices for formatting such as bold, italics, and underline and font size and font color. Bold, Italic and Underline are the most common types of text formatting. Almost all formatting options are available under Format menu. 1. Click to make the text Bold.

2. Click to make the text Italic.

3. Click to make the text underlined.

Alternatively Ctrl+B, Ctrl+I, Ctrl+U keys are used to make the selected text bold, italic and underlined respectively.

4. A font is a set of characters and numbers in a certain style. Some fonts, like Times New Roman looks professional and suited for business documents. Fajita is decorative. Symbols and Windings are actually sets of symbols.

This icon is used to Change the font style.

5. The size of font is measured in points, and there are 72 points to an inch. This icon is used to change the font size.

6. A different color for selected text can be used. To Use a different text color, select the text and click the arrow in Font Color icon.

7. The same can also be achieved by clicking on Format����Character and then selecting an

option from Typeface list box.

Page 152: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

152 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

6. Explain the different types paragraph alignment? � There are four types of paragraph alignment in star office writer. � They are

o Left alignment o Right alignment o Justify alignment o Center alignment

Left alignment is a default paragraph alignment. Following steps are used to change alignment of a paragraph.

1. To Change the alignment of one paragraph, first click within that paragraph. 2. Done one of the following.

Click to left align text.

Click to right align text.

Click to justify text.

Click to center text.

3. The following keyboard shortcuts can be used to change the alignment.

4. The following commands can be used to change the alignment.

Command Use Format�Alignment�Left Format�Alignment�Right Format�Alignment�Center Format�Alignment�Justify

Left Alignment Right Alignment Center Alignment Justify Alignment

Left align - Ctrl+ L Right align - Ctrl+ R Justify - Ctrl +J Center - Ctrl+ E

Page 153: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

153 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

7. How to create bullets and numbering lists and how to remove the bullets and numbered list?

� When the documents presents a matter using text in the form of long paragraphs the reader may not be able to quickly notice the importance points or messages. For this purpose bullets and numbers are used to list the important points and messages.

� Star office writer provides various styles for the bullets and numbers, which can be selected using Format����Bullets & Numbering.

I. Creating a Bulleted List:

1. Select the text that to which bullets are to be added.

2. Click on the Bullets Icon from the formatting toolbar, Star office writer creates a bulleted list.

3. Star office writer will not add bullets for each line and any blanks lines within the

selection. Example:

� Tamil � English � Computer Science

II. Creating a Numbered List:

1. Select the text to be numbered.

2. Click icon to create a numbered list.

3. The star office writer will number each paragraph. Star office writer will not add numbers for each line and any blanks lines within the selection.

Example: 1) Tamil 2) English 3) Computer Science

III. Removing Bullets and Numbered List:

1. To remove Bullets from a list, select the list and the Bullets icon is clicked again. 2. To remove Numbered from a list, select the list and the Numbered icon is clicked again.

Example: Tamil English Computer Science

Page 154: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

154 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

8. Explain the indenting text with the paragraph dialog box lists? The Increase indent and Decrease indent icons are useful if it is needed to indent text

from the left. If one wants to indent from left and right or if one wants to create a special kind of indent, a different method is used. The paragraph dialog box must be used.

1. Move the insertion point to the beginning of the paragraph to be indented. To indent several paragraphs, select those paragraphs.

2. Select Format����Paragraph command. 3. Click Indents & Spacing tab in the paragraph dialog box. 4. Do any one of the following:

i) To indent from the left, type the amount to be indented in the Before Text spin box or use the spin arrows to select a value.

ii) To indent text from the right, type the amount or use the After text spin arrows to enter the amount in the spin box.

iii) Click the OK button. 5. The First Line option can be used to indent the line of the paragraph. Using the spin

arrows, if a positive value is specified, the first line will be indented. A negative value will result in a hanging indent; that is first line will hang outside the paragraph.

9. Explain would carry out the spell check after the entire document is typed? 1. Tools����Spelling����Check is selected or the F7 key may also be pressed to select the

spelling command. Or icon is clicked. The Spell check dialog box appeared.

2. Not in dictionary text area displays the misspelled word and the Suggestions list displays any alternative spellings.

3. To skip this occurrence but stop on the next one Ignore Once button is clicked. To skip all occurrences of this word Ignore All button is clicked.

4. To replace the word one of the selected spellings, in the suggestions list that spelling is

clicked and Change button is clicked. To change this occurrence and Change All button clicked to replace all occurrences of the word.

5. If none of the replacements is correct, correction can be made manually in the Not in

dictionary text area. Add button is clicked to add the word to the dictionary.

Page 155: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

155 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

10. How would you add a word to the Auto Correct list in Star Office Writer? Star office writer recognizes some common misspellings and typographical mistakes

and makes the replacement automatically. For instance if a word is typed as “teh”, Star office writer automatically replaces this with correct word “the”.

In addition to the ones star office automatically corrects, the user can add other words to the list.

1. Choose Tools����AutoCorrect����AutoFormat. 2. Now AutoCorrect dialog box appeared. 3. In this box with the Replace tab selected the word to be replaced is typed in the

Replace text box and the replacement word in the with text box. 4. When the same mistake is made star office writer will automatically replace the

misspelled word with the correct spelling.

11. Explain the functions of the table formatting toolbar?

S.No Icon Name Use

1. Table Fixed

2. Table Fixed, Proportional

3. Table, Variable

4. Merge Cells This icon is used to combine two or more cell into a single cell.

5. Split Cells This icon is used to split a cell into two or more cells.

6. Optimize Clicking on this icon displays a popup menu with options like Space Column Equally, Space Row Equally, Optimum Row Height and Optimum Column Width .

7. Inserting

Row This icon is used to insert row below the current row.

8. Inserting Column

This icon is used to insert a column to the right of the current column.

9. Delete Row This icon is used to deletes the current row from the table

10. Delete

Column This icon is used to deletes the current column from the table.

11. Borders This icon displays a floating toolbar with different border option for the table.

12. Line Style This icon is used to choose the line style of to be used for the border.

13. Border Colour

Clicking on this icon displays a palette of colours that can be sued as a border colour for the table.

Page 156: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

156 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

12. Explain the various methods to changing the margin? Margins control how to close Star Office Writer prints to the edge of the page.

Using any one of the following methods, margins can be changed.

I. Page style dialog box: 1. Format����Page command is selected. Page style dialog box appeared. 2. Click the Page tab, if necessary. 3. In margins group, type the new values in the spin boxes or use the spin arrows to

change the value. 4. Click OK button. 5. Use the File����Page Preview can be used to see the change.

II. Using Rulers: 1. If the ruler is not displayed in the screen, View����Ruler is clicked. 2. The gray area of the ruler indicates the margin’s top area. 3. When the pointer is in the right spot, it changes into a line with arrows on both sides. 4. The margin guide is dragged to a new location.

13. Explain the How to creating header and footer with an example? When the documents are longer than one page, normally some type of reference numbers are added on the page. For instance, Page numbers are a must. Otherwise even if the pages are stapled or bound a particular page cannot be easily referred. Header is an area at the top of the page and footer is an area of at the bottom of page. The user can specify what he wants to display in this area and star office writer will insert the specified text automatically of each page. I. Creating Header:

1. Choose Format����Page command. 2. The page style dialog box will appeared. 3. In this box select Header tab. 4. In this box, the Header On check box is clicked. 5. Four spin boxes are also displayed. In those spin boxes the distance of the header

from the text area, the header height, the distance from the left margin and right margin are entered.

6. Click OK button. Now the header can be created on the page. II. Creating Footer:

1. The same procedure is followed for creating footer. 2. Choose Format����Page command. 3. The page style dialog box will appeared. 4. In this box select Footer tab. 5. In this box, the Footer On check box is clicked. 6. Four spin boxes are also displayed. In those spin boxes the distance of the footer

from the text area, the footer height, the distance from the left margin and right margin are entered. Click OK button. Now the footer can be created on the page.

Example: Clicking on Insert����Fields����Page Number will insert page numbers on every page.

Page 157: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

157 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

Question No: 103, 104: [Star Office Calc]

1. Define briefly a Spreadsheet and its basic structure?

An electronic spreadsheet is a worksheet used in a computer to create and

quickly perform “what if analysis of interrelated columnar data in

workspaces.

� A spreadsheet is like grid of cells with a programmable calculator attached to

each cell.

� A spreadsheet is a tool for working with numbers.

� A spreadsheet program is used to calculate and analyze sets of numbers.

� Spreadsheet is made up of rows and columns.

� The intersection of rows and columns creates cells.

� The cells are addressed in terms of the row and column labels.

� Cell contain values, labels and formulae.

� Rows are numbered as 1,2,3……………

� Columns are represented as A,B,C,D…………..

� In the case of Star Office Calc you can have up to 32,000 rows.

� VisiCalc contains 63 columns (A,B………………BK) and 254 Rows.

� VisiCalc was essentially a financial analysis program.

� Non numerical entries are called lables.

Page 158: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

158 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

2. What are the advantages of the using electronic spreadsheet? [Or] List and describe the other features available with spreadsheet software in addition to its ability calculate numbers. 1. Calculations are automated through the built in mathematical, financial and statistical

functions. 2. Accurate results to any desired level of decimal points possible. 3. Worksheets can be quite big in size. 4. Any part of the worksheet can be viewed or edited. 5. Worksheet can be saved and retrieved later. 6. Any part or whole of an existing worksheet can be merged with any existing or new

worksheet. 7. Any part or whole of the worksheet can be printed in a desired format. 8. Worksheet data can be viewed in the form of graphs or charts. 9. The worksheets information can be transferred to any database or word processing

software.

3. How can you generate a series of values? Explain with an example [Or] Explain uses of

Fill Command. � The fill command is used to generate a series. � The fill command is used to generate a series of data directly from the values of the

selected cells. � First select the cells of the worksheet that you want to fill, and choose the command

Edit����Fill����Series. � Select the type of series from the options that appears in Fill Series dialog box. � To copy the contents of a cell, click on the cell click and drag the mouse to highlight all

the cells where you want to copy the contents. Now select Edit����Fill����Down or Edit����Fill����Left command.

� The content of first cell will be copied in all the highlighted cells. Example: We can also use the Fill Command to generate a series of data directly from the values of the selected cells.

1. First select the cells of the worksheet that you want to fill.

2. Choose the command Edit����Fill����Series.

3. Fill Series dialog box appears.

4. Select the Growth as the Type, and Down as the Direction.

5. Enter the value 1 as Start value text box.

6. Enter the value 100 as End value text box.

7. Enter the value 1 as Increment text box.

8. Now click on OK and you will find the worksheet filled from 1 to 100.

Page 159: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

159 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

4. Explain about formatting options in spreadsheet. Star Office Calc provides you with several formatting options for formatting numbers. It is

important to remember that by formatting the contents of a cell, only the display changes; the contents remain unchanged.

Icon Use

This icon is used to display data in bold.

This icon is used to display data in italics.

This icon used to underline the data in highlighted cells.

This is the Change Font icon. It used to change the font style.

This icon is used to change the font size.

This icon is used to change the font color.

These are the Align left, Align Center, Align Right, Align justify icons. They are used to align the contents of cells.

This is the Number Format: Currency icon. Clicking on this will display the contents of the selected cells in currency format that is with $ in front and with two decimal digits.

This is the Number Format: Percent icon. Clicking on this icon will display the current contents in percentage format.

This is the Number Format: Standard icon. Clicking on this icon will display the contents of the selected cells in default format.

These are the Number Format: Add Decimal and Number Format: Delete Decimal icons. They are used to increase or decrease the number of decimal digits that are to be displayed in the selected cells.

The Format menu can also be used to format cells. To do so, Select the cells you want to format and click Format����Cells. The Format Cells dialog box appears. Tabs at the top of the dialog box can be used to choose the type of cell attribute you want to use.

Page 160: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

160 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

5. How would you inserting cells, Rows and Columns in spreadsheet? To insert an empty cell or an empty row or a column in worksheet already created, follow the procedure given below.

Click the Insert Cell from View����Toolbar menu. A floating toolbar with four icons appears. These icons are

1. Insert Cells Down 2. Insert Cells Right 3. Insert Rows 4. Insert Columns

1. Insert Cells Down: In order to insert an empty cell in a column and move the existing cells down, place the

cursor in the cell where you want to insert the new cell and click on the Insert Cells Down icon.

Ex: In the Marks worksheet, to insert a cell in D4 and move the contents of the cell D4:D7 down, select D4 and click the icon. 2. Insert Cells Right:

In order to shift the content of a cell to the right and to create an empty cell, select the cell and click the Insert Cells Right icon.

Ex: In the Marks worksheet, to insert cell in C4 and move the content of the cell C4:F4 to D4:G4. To do so, select the cell C4 and click the icon.

3. Insert Rows: In order to insert an empty row in a worksheet, select the row where you want to insert the new row and click the Insert Rows icon. Ex: If you want to insert a row between Row 1 and Row 2 in the Marks worksheet select the Row 2 click the icon. 4. Insert Column:

In order to insert a column, select the column where you want to insert and click the Insert Columns icon.

Ex: If you want insert a column between E and F in the Marks worksheet, select the column F and click the icon.

Page 161: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

161 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

6. Explain the procedure for deleting a cell, rows and columns in a worksheet? (Or) How will you delete a cell or row and columns?

� Edit ����Delete����Contents command is used to delete only contents from the

selected cell or active cell. � To procedure for deleting a cell, row or column in a worksheet as follows.

o Use Edit����Delete Cells command to open Delete Cells dialog box. o Delete Cells dialog box displays the 4 options. They are

� Shift Cells Up

� Shift Cells left

� Delete entire row(s)

� Delete entire column(s)

Shift Cells up fills the space produced by the deleted cells with the cells underneath it.

Shift Cells left fills the space by the cells to the right of the deleted cells.

Delete entire row(s) option to delete the selected row.

Delete entire column(s) option is used to delete selected column.

Page 162: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

162 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

7. What are the functions? How can you use them in your worksheet? Explain with an example.

Functions: Functions are predefined formulae that are available in star office calc. 1. To select a function, choose the command Insert����Function (Or) icon is

clicked. 2. The Function Wizard dialog box appears. 3. A list of all functions is displayed in the Function box when All selected in the

Category box. 4. If a category is selected (Ex: Mathematical) the functions related to that category

alone will be displayed in the function box. 5. Scroll down the list to find function you want. Click once on the function name

to see a short description of that function on right side of the window. Double click on to insert it into the worksheet.

Example: To Insert the SQRT function (To find the square root of a number)

1. Place the cursor in any one cell.

2. Choose the command Insert����Function or click Function Wizard icon.

3. Select Mathematical from Category.

4. Select the SQRT function from the list of functions, which appears by double clicking on it.

5. The Function Wizard displays a brief description of the function and prompts you

to enter the number on which the function should work.

6. Enter the number 64, when you click OK button the result 8 is displayed in the cell in the worksheet.

Page 163: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

163 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

8. Explain the how to create charts in worksheet. [Or] Explain about working with chart in Star Office Calc.

One of the most popular features of star office calc software the ability to generate charts based on numeric data. The purpose of charts is to visually present the data for easy understanding.

1. Select the data you want to chart. 2. Click on Insert����Chart or Click on the Insert Chart icon. 3. The cursor becomes a + sign with small picture of the graph. Place this cursor where you

want to insert the chart and click. The Autoformat Chart window appeared. 4. It prompts you enter the area in the worksheet to be charted and click Next. 5. The next window, which appeared and displays the different types of charts that can be

created along with a preview of each. Select the type of chart in which you want to present the data. Click on Next.

6. For each type of the chart there are different formats available. Here select the desired format. Click on Next.

7. In the next window, you have provisions to give Title for the chart, Titles for X and Y axes and legends.

8. Click Create. Now chart will be created in your worksheet.

9. How would you inserting pictures and Special characters in your work sheet? In the worksheet, Star Office calc also provides for inserting pictures and special characters

like α,β.

I. Inserting Pictures: 1. Place the cell pointer in any cell. 2. Choose the Insert����Picture����From File. 3. The Insert Picture dialog box appears. 4. In this box select any one picture file and click Open.

II. Inserting Special Characters:

1. Place the cell pointer in any cell. 2. Choose the Insert����Special Characters from the menu bar. 3. Special Characters dialog box appears. 4. In this box select any one special character and click the Ok Button.

Page 164: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

164 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

10. Explain about various icons of Inserting Objects.

Star Office Calc provides tools for inserting objects like Charts, images from image editor, formulae, etc.

Click Insert Object from View����Toolbar. A floating toolbar appears with the following icons in the order listed below.

1. Insert Chart icon. 2. Insert Formula icon. 3. Insert Floating Frame icon. 4. Insert Movie and Sound icon. 5. Insert OLE object icon. 6. Insert Applet icon.

1. Insert Chart icon: This icon is used for presenting the data in the worksheet in from of charts of different

kinds such as Bar Chart, Pie Chart, Lines, X-Y plot etc. More details on charting are given in a later section.

2. Insert Formula icon:

This icon is used for inserting a formula in the worksheet for performing calculations.

3. Insert Floating Frame icon: This icon provides to generate a scrolling screen within a worksheet.

4. Insert Movie and Sound icon: This icon is used to insert sound or video files into the current worksheet.

5. Insert OLE Object icon: This icon is used to import objects from other application into a worksheet.

6. Insert Applet icon: This icon is used to import Applets written in Java Programming Language into the worksheet.

Page 165: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

165 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

Question No: 105 [Star Office Base]

1. What are the disadvantages of manual data processing?

1. The efficiency and correctness of data processing are limited to the capabilities of the

individual who is processing the data.

2. Manual methods take more time.

3. In general human beings are liable to make computational and parallax errors.

4. Manual data processing involves use of papers at each stage. Preservation and

maintenance of large volume of paper records becomes difficult and unmanageable.

5. Implementation of corrections, changes and modification are tedious in manual data

processing.

2. What are the advantages of computerized data processing?

1. Once we can collect and enter the data into a computer system we can perform other

operations with less manual labour. So manpower is considerable saved.

2. Though it takes some time to develop, test and put the required computer programs to

use, the processing speed is fast, reducing the processing time, in certain cases, from

man-years and man-months to minutes and seconds.

3. The changes of errors are less in computerized data processing.

4. We can store large amount of the data and information in the computer storage

medium, which is compact. Hence we need not store bundles of paper records thus

saving space.

5. Today computer networks are so common that we can share data and resources from

one computer system to the other at a very fast speed and with very little effort, as in

the case of railway and airline reservation systems.

6. It is easy to edit the data including correction, changes and modifications.

7. Computerized database is highly effective for searching, sorting and merging files and

for other data manipulation activities.

Page 166: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

166 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

3. Explain the manipulation of Database?

1. Searching: Searching is a process to select a desired specific data from a database. For example We want to select the student ranking first in a class with respect to the total marks.

2. Sorting: Sorting is the process of arranging the data in a table in some order. For example we may arrange the students name in alphabetical order.

3. Merging: Merging is a process of joining data from two or more tables of the same or different databases.

4. Performing calculations on Data: We may do any kind of arithmetic calculations on the data stored in the database. For Example to obtain the total marks of all the subjects of student, you may add the marks in the concerned fields of the database and store them in a separate field.

5. Filtering: There are times when viewing the entire table is unwieldy. Using a Filter is a way of limiting the information that appears on screen. Filters are a feature for displaying and browsing a selected list or subset of records from a table. The visible records satisfy the condition. Those do not satisfy the condition are hidden.

6. Editing the Database: Editing is a process of performing corrections on the existing data, deleting the existing data, fields, or records , adding new data, fields, records. Changing the database format and so on.

7. Report Generation: � Report is a printed information on the paper. � We may generate any desired report, from the data of the database. For example in the

case of student database, we may generate a report the list of passed students and so on.

1. Searching 2. Sorting 3. Merging 4. Performing Calculations on Data 5. Filtering 6. Editing the Data Base 7. Report Generation

Page 167: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

167 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

4. Explain the various types of Data Base.

1. Flat-File Database: A database file that consists of a single data table is a Flat-File database. Data that stored, managed and manipulated in spreadsheet is another example of a flat-file database. Ex: Spreadsheet

2. Relational Database: A relational structure represents a database made up of a set of related tables. In a relational database one or more common fields existing in two or more tables create a relationship between these tables. The common field of fields are called the keys.

A primary key is a key that uniquely identifies a record in a database table.

The relational database structures is the most prevent database in today’s business organizations.

3. Hierarchical database: The hierarchical database structures were primarily used on Main Frame computers. In hierarchical databases, records are organized in a tree like structure by type. The relationship between record is said to be a parent-child relationship, in which any child type relates only to a single parent type. 4. Network Database:

The network database is very similar to the hierarchical structure except that any one record type can relate to any number of other record types.

5. Object Oriented Database: � An Object oriented database is a newer structure that has been generating a great deal of

interest in recent types.

� The object oriented structure groups data items and their associated characteristics, attributes and procedures into complex items called as Objects.

� An object is defined by its characteristics, attributes and procedures. An objects

characteristics can be text, sound, video. Examples of attributes might be color, size, and style. A procedure refers to the processing or handling that can be associated to the object.

1) Flat-File database 2) Relational database 3) Hierarchical database 4) Network database 5) Object-oriented database

Page 168: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

168 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

5. What is Filter? Explain the about filter in Star Of fice Base? Filters:

A filter is also a type of query. It is also used to select and display records, which match a certain condition. The remaining records are hidden form the user. The difference between query and filter is that queries can be saved for later use.

1. Auto Filter: The AutoFilter icon is available on the standard toolbar. Click on this icon to display only the records, which match the value of the current field.

2. Standard Filter:

Filter used with a condition called Default Filter . The condition can be specifying by clicking on the Standard Filter icon on the toolbar.

Example:

1. Open an existing table from the Table pane by double clicking on it.

2. Click the Standard Filter icon from the main toolbar. A Filter window

appeared.

3. Select Maths in the Field Name box.

4. Select > operator in the condition box.

5. Type 90 in the Value box.

6. Click on OK.

Display the records in the original order, click on the Remove Filter/Sort icon.

Page 169: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

169 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

6. What is sorting? How to sorting the records in Data Base.

Sorting the Records:

Once the records have been entered into the table, Star Base allows you to rearrange them by sorting them. You can sort the records is ascending or descending orders based on any field in the table. 1. Open the table that we want to sort. 2. Select the field we want to sort by clicking on the field name at the top of the table.

Then click on the Sort Ascending icon. The records in the table are displayed in the ascending order of the specified field.

3. To sort the records in the descending order, select the field and click Sort Descending icon.

Multiple Sort:

Multiple sorting means sorting one or more than one field of a table at the same time.

1. Click Sort icon. The sort order dialog box appeared.

2. Specify the fields you want to sort on by selecting them from the Field Name drop-down list boxes. For each field specify the order in which we want to sort, in the Order drop-down list box.

3. Click OK after we finish. The records will be displayed in the sorted order.

4. To display the records in the original order, click on the Remove Filter/Sort icon.

Page 170: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

170 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

Question No: 106 (Basic Statements) [Lesson No: 3] 1. Explain the If Statements with an example.

If Statement: is the simplest of all the decision statements. It is implemented in two ways. 1. Simple if statements 2. If….Else statements

1. Simple if statements: The general format is

Example:

Working of the program:

In the above program the message “Pass” gets printed if the condition is evaluated to true, Otherwise the control jumps to getch();

if (Condition)

{

action block;

}

#include<iostream.h>

#include<conio.h>

void main( )

{

int mark=75;

if(mark>70)

cout<<”Pass”;

getch( );

}

Page 171: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

171 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

1. If……Else statement: If……Else statement which chooses between two alternatives, executes the chosen block based on the condition.

The General Format as follows

Example:

Working of the program:

In the above program “Pass” is printed if the expression is evaluated to true, Otherwise statement following else option will be executed.

if(condition)

{

action block-1;

}

else

{

action block-2;

}

#include<iostream.h>

#include<conio.h>

void main( )

{

int mark=75;

if(mark>70)

cout<<”Pass”;

else

cout<<”Fail”;

getch( );

}

Page 172: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

172 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

2. What is Loop? Explain loops in C++. [Or] Explain any one loop in C++ with example. Loop: Loops execute a set of instructions repeatedly for a certain number if times. There are three kinds of loops in C++.

1. For ( ) 2. While( ) 3. Do…….While( )

1. For ( ): It is a entry controlled loop and is used when an action is to be repeated for a

predetermined number of times. The general syntax is

Example:

for(i=1;i<5;i++) Increment Test Condition Initialization

The general working of for( ) loop is

1. Enter the loop. 2. Initializes the control variable num to 2. 3. The test condition is (num<=6) is evaluated if the text condition is true. 4. Print the square of num. 5. Increments num by 1. 6. Control is transferred to step 3. 7. End.

for (initial value; condition; increment)

{

action block;

}

#include<iostream.h>

#include<conio.h>

void main( )

{

for(int num=2;num<=6;num++)

cout<<num*num;

getch( );

}

Page 173: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

173 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

2. While( ): Definition: It is called as the entry-check loop. The body of the loop will be executed only if the test expression results true placed in the while statement. The control exits the loop once the test expression is evaluated to false.

The general syntax is Example Program:

Working of the program:

8. Enter the loop. 9. Initializes the control variable num to 2. 10. The test condition is (num<=6) is evaluated if the text condition is true. 11. Print the square of num. 12. Increments num by 1. 13. Control is transferred to step 3. 14. End

while (condition)

{

action block;

}

#include<iostream.h>

#include<conio.h>

void main( )

{

int num=2;

while(num<=6)

{

cout<<num*num;

num+=1;

}

getch( );

}

Page 174: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

174 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

3. Do…..while( ): Definition: It is called as exit-check loop, as the condition marks the last statement of the body of the loop.

The general syntax is

Example program:

Working of the program:

1. Enter the loop. 2. Initializes the control variable num to 2. 3. Print the square of num. 4. Increments num by 1. 5. The test condition is (num<=6) is evaluated if the text condition is true. 6. Control is transferred to step 3. 7. End

do

{

action block;

} while (condition);

#include<iostream.h>

#include<conio.h>

void main( )

{

int num=2;

do

{

cout<<num*num;

num+=1;

} while(num<=6);

getch( );

}

Page 175: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

175 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

3. Explain Switch Statement with an example. Definition: It is a multiple branching statement where based on a condition, the control is transferred to one of the many possible points. The general syntax is

Example program:

Working of the program:

� If n=1 then case1 will be executed and printed “One”, if n=2 then case2 will be executed and printed “Two”. If n=5 then default case will be executed and printed “Invalid Number”.

� Include break in action block, in order to exit from switch statement.

Switch(expression)

{

case 1: action block1;

break;

case 2: action block2;

break;

case 3: action block3;

break;

default: action block4;

}

#include<iostream.h>

#include<conio.h>

void main( )

{

int n;

cout<<”Enter the number”;

cin>>n;

switch(n)

{

case 1:cout<<” One”;

break;

case 2:cout<<” Two”;

break;

case 3:cout<<” Three”;

break;

case 4:cout<<”Four”;

break;

default:cout<<”Invalid number”;

}

getch( );

}

Page 176: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

176 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

4. Explain Nested… If Statement with example. Nested…If Statement:

Definition: 1. The statement sequence of if or else may contain another if statement. The If…Else

statement can be nested within another. 2. In an nested if…….else statement, “Each else matches with the nearest unmatched

preceding if”. The general syntax is

Example Program:

Working of the program:

1. m1>70 and m2>70, then pass will be printed 2. m1>70 and m2<70, then fail will be printed. 3. m1<70, the inner if will not be executed, the

outer else will be executed and thus prints “Try to get pass”.

if(condition)

if(condition)

{

action block-1;

}

else

{

action block-2;

}

else

{

action block-3;

}

#include<iostream.h>

#include<conio.h>

void main( )

{

int m1,m2;

cout<<”Enter the values of m1 and m2”;

cin>>m1>>m2;

if(m1>70)

if(m2>70)

{

cout<<”Pass”;

}

else

{

cout<<”Fail”;

}

else

{

cout<<”Try to get pass”;

}

getch( );

}

Page 177: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

177 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

Question No: 107 (Functions) [Lesson No: 4]

1. Explain about to how calling a function with an example? A function can be called or invoked from another function by using its name. The function name may include a set of actual parameters, enclosed in parentheses separated by comma.

Formal Parameters

Actual Parameters Working of a function

#include<iostream.h>

#include<conio.h>

int add(int a , int b)

{

return a+b;

}

void main( )

{

int x1,x2,sum=0;

cin>>x1>>x2;

sum=add(x1,x2);

cout<<sum;

getch( );

}

int add (int , int )

…….

return a+b;

}

void main( )

{

……….

Sum=add(x1,x2);

cout<<sum;

}

Page 178: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

178 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

2. Explain Call by value and Call by reference with an example. Call by Value: 1. In this method, the called function creates new variables to store the value of the

arguments passed to it. 2. This method copies the values of actual parameters into the formal parameters. 3. Thus the function creates its own copy of arguments and then uses them. Example:

Ouput:

10 20

20 10

10 20

#include<iostream.h>

#include<conio.h>

void swap(int a, int b)

{

int temp;

temp=a;

a=b;

b=temp;

cout<<a<<’\t’<<b;

}

void main( )

{

int m1=10,m2=20;

cout<<m1<<’\t’<<m2;

swap(m1,m2);

cout<<m1<<’\t’<<m2;

getch( );

}

In Call by value method, any change in the formal parameter is not reflected back to the actual parameter.

Page 179: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

179 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

Call by Reference: 1. In this method, the called function arguments-formal parameters become alias to the

actual parameters in the calling function. 2. This means that when the function is working with its own arguments, it is actually

working on the original data.

Example:

Output:

10 20

20 10

20 10

#include<iostream.h>

#include<conio.h>

void swap(int &a, int &b)

{

int temp;

temp=a;

a=b;

b=temp;

cout<<a<<’\t’<<b;

}

void main( )

{

int m1=10,m2=20;

cout<<m1<<’\t’<<m2;

swap(m1,m2);

cout<<m1<<’\t’<<m2;

getch( );

}

In call by reference method, any change made in the formal parameter is reflected back in the actual parameter.

Page 180: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

180 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

3. What are the rules for actual parameters?

1. The actual parameters can be passed in the form of constants, variables or expressions to the formal parameters which are of value type. For example, For a function prototype int add(int a , int b) the call statements may be as follows x=add(5,10); x=add((5+10),3); x=add(a1,a2); Where a1,a2 are variables.

2. The actual parameters can be passed only as variables to formal parameters of reference type. For example, int add(int &a , int &b) The call statements as follows X=add(a1,a2); Where a1,a2 are variables. The following call statements are invalid: X=add((a1+b1),a1); X=add(5,10)

Page 181: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

181 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

4. What is inline function? Explain with an example?

Example:

As shown in the above example, the call statement to the function convert_feet(inches) will be replaced by the expression in the return statement inches*12.

� To make a function inline, one has to insert the keyword inline in the function header.

Note:

� Inline keyword is just a request to the compiler. Sometimes the compiler will ignore the request and treat as a normal function and vice versa.

An Inline looks like a normal function in the source file but inserts the function’s code directly into the calling program. Inline function execute faster but require more memory space.

#include<iostream.h>

#include<conio.h>

inline float convert_feet(int x)

{

return x*12;

}

void main( )

{

int inches=45;

cout<<convert_feet(inches);

getch( );

}

Page 182: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

182 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

5. What is scope? Explain the types of scope with programs. Scope: Scope refers to the accessibility of a variable. 1. Local scope 2. Function scope 3. File Scope 4. Class Scope 1. Local Scope:

1. A local variable is defined within a block. 2. The scope of a local variable is the block in which it is defined. 3. A local variable cannot be accessed from outside the block of its declaration. 4. Local variables are not known outside their own code block. A block of code begins

and ends with curly braces { }. 5. Local variables exist only while the block of code in which they are declared is

executed. 2. Function Scope:

The scope of variables declared within a function is executed to the function block, and all sub blocks there in. The life time of a function scope variable is the life time of the function block. The scope of formal parameters is function scope.

3. File Scope: A variable declared I above all blocks and functions above main( ) ahs to the scope of file. The scope of a file scope variable is the entire program. The lifetime of a file scope variable is lifetime of a program.

Example:

#include<iostream.h> #include<conio.h> int a=10; File scope void main( ) { int a=4,b=7; { int c; Function Scope c=a+b; cout<<c; Local Scope } }

Page 183: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

183 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

4. Class Scope: 1. The members that have been declared as private can be accessed only from within

the class. 2. The members that have been declared as protected can be accessed from within the

class, and the members of the inherited classes. 3. The members that have been declared as public can be accessed from outside the

class also.

Class class_name

{

private:

variable declaration;

function declaration;

protected:

variable declaration;

function declaration;

public:

variable declaration;

function declaration;

};

Page 184: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

184 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

Question No: 108[Polymorphism-Lesson No: 7]

1. What is function overloading? Explain with an example.

Example:

float area( float a);

float area( float a, float b);

float area( float a, float b, float c);

The first prototype had one argument, second prototype had two arguments and

third prototype had three arguments.

Rules for function Overloading:

1. Each overloaded function must differ either by the number of its formal parameters or their data types.

2. The return type of overloaded functions may or may not be the same data type. 3. The default arguments of overloaded functions are not considered by the C++ compiler as part

of the parameter list. 4. Do not use the same function name for two unrelated functions.

Example program:

The ability of the function to process the message or data in more than one form is called as function over loading.

#include<iostream.h>

#include<conio.h>

int add( int a ,int b)

{

return a+b;

}

int add(int a, int b, int c)

{

return a+b+c;

}

void main( )

{

cout<<add(10,20);

cout<<add(10,20,30);

}

Page 185: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

185 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

2. What is operator overloading? Explain with an example.

The function void operator-( ) simply negates the data members of the class as one would with a normal variable as follows: sum=-num1;

The term operator overloading, refers to giving additional functionality to the normal C++ operators like +,++,-,--,+=,-=,*,<,>.

[Or]

The mechanism of giving special meaning to an operator is called as operator overloading.

#include<iostream.h>

#include<conio.h>

class negative

{

int i;

public:

void accept( )

{

cout<<”\n Enter the number”;

cin>>i;

}

void display( )

{

cout<<”\n Number…”<<i;

}

void operator-( )

{

i = - i;

}

};

void main( )

{

negative n2;

n2.accept( );

-n2;

n2.display( );

}

Page 186: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

186 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

3. What are the rules for operator overloading? 1. Only existing operators can be overloaded. New operators cannot be created. 2. The overloaded operator must have at least one operand of user defined type. 3. The basic definition of an operator cannot be replaced or in other words on

cannot redefine the function of an operator. One can give additional functions to an operator.

4. Overload operators behave in the same way as the basic operators in terms of their operands.

5. When binary operators are overloaded, the left hand object must be an object of the relevant class.

6. Binary operators overloaded through a member function take one explicit argument.

4. Explain the different types of inheritance? Classes can be derived from that are themselves derived. These are five types of inheritance in C++ They are

o Single Inheritance o Multiple Inheritance o Multilevel Inheritance o Hybrid Inheritance o Hierarchical Inheritance

1) Single Inheritance:

When a derived class inherits only from one base class, it is known as single inheritance.

Base Class-Employee

Derived Class-Employee

Page 187: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

187 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

2) Multiple Inheritance: When a derived class inherits from multiple base classes it is known as multiple inheritance.

3) Multilevel Inheritance:

The transitive nature of inheritance is reflected by this form of inheritance. When a class is derived from a class which is a derived class itself-them this is reflected to as multilevel inheritance.

Base Class-Address Base Class-Office

Derived Class-Manager

Base Class-Grand Father

Derived Class-Father

Derived Class-Child

Wish you All the Best

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed.,

MOBILE: 9994368476

Page 188: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

188 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

Question No: 109

1. Debug the following C++ program to get the output.

1 %include<iostream.h> 2 #include[conio.h] 3 class A 4 { 5 Private 6 int a1; 7 public; 8 int a2; 9 void getdata( ) 10 { 11 a1=3; 12 a2=5,a3=5; 13 } 14 protected 15 int a3; 16 } 17 } 18 class B: :public A( ) 19 { 20 public: 21 void func( ) 22 { 23 int b1;b2;b3; 24 getdata( ) 25 { 26 b1=a1; 27 b2=a2; 28 b3=a3; 29 cout>>b1>>b2>>b3; 30 } 31 } 32 Void main [ ] 33 { 35 B der; 36 d.func( ); 37

Page 189: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

189 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

Line No Wrong Code Correct Code

1

2

5

7

14

17

18

23

29

31

32

36

37

%include<iostream.h> #include[conio.h] Private public; protected } class B: :public A( ) int b1;b2;b3; cout>>b1>>b2>>b3; } Void main [ ] d.func( ); missing }

#include<iostream.h> #include<conio.h> private: public: protected: }; class B : public A int b1,b2,b3; cout<<b1<<b2<<b3; }; void main( ) der.fuc( ); }

Page 190: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

190 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

2. Debug the following C++ program to get the output.

1 $include<iostream.h> 2 #include<conio> 3 class simple 4 { 5 private: 6 int a,b 7 public 8 simple( ) 9 { 10 a=0; 11 b=0 12 cout>>”\n Contructor of class simple”; 13 } 14 +simple( ) 15 { 16 cout<<”\n Destructor of class simple” 17 } 18 void get( ) 19 { 20 cout<<”\n Enter the values for a and b”; 21 cin<<a<<b; 22 } 23 void data( ) 24 { 25 cout<<”\n The two integers are”<<a<<’\t’<<b; 26 cout<<”\n The sum of two integers are”<<a+b; 27 } 28 } ; 29 VOID main( ) 30 { 31 simp s; 32 s.getdata( ) 33 s.putdata( ); 34 }

Page 191: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

191 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

Line No Wrong Code Correct Code

1

6

7

11

12

14

16

18

21

23

29

31

32

$include<iostream.h> int a,b public b=0 cout>>”\n Contructor of class simple”;

+simple( ) cout<<”\n Destructor of class simple”

void get( ) cin<<a<<b; void data( ) VOID main( ) simp s; s.getdata( )

#include<iostream.h> int a,b; public: b=0; cout<<”\n Contructor of class simple”;

~simple( ) cout<<”\n Destructor of class simple”;

void getdata( ) cin>>a>>b; void putdata( ) void main( ) simple s; s.getdata ( );

Page 192: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

192 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

3. Debug the following C++ program to get the output.

1 #include[iostream.h] 2 #include conio.h 3 CLASS base 4 { 5 public 6 base( ) 7 { 8 cout>>”\n Constructor”; 9 } 10 ^base ( ) 11 { 12 cout<<”\n Destructor”; 13 } 14 }; 15 class derived ? public base 16 { 17 public: 18 derived( ) 19 { 20 cout>>”\n Derived Constructor”; 21 } 22 ~derived( ) 23 { 24 cout<<”\n Derived Destructor” 25 } 26 }; 27 void main[ ] 28 { 29 derived d; 30 }

Page 193: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

193 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

Line No Wrong Code Correct Code

1

2

3

5

8

10

15

20

24

27

#include[iostream.h] #include conio.h CLASS base public cout>>”\n Constructor”; ^base ( ) class derived ? public base cout>>”\n Derived Constructor”;

cout<<”\n Derived Destructor”

void main[ ]

#include<iostream.h> #include <conio.h> class base public: cout<<”\n Constructor”; ~base ( ) class derived : public base

cout<<”\n Derived Constructor”;

cout<<”\n Derived Destructor”;

void main( )

Page 194: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

194 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

4. Debug the following C++ program to get the output.

1 #include<oistream.h> 2 ^include<conio.h> 3 class sum( ) 4 { 5 private; 6 Int a=b=0; 7 public 8 sum ( ) 9 { 10 a=b=5; 11 cout>>”\n Constructor”; 12 } 13 ~~sum( ) 14 { 15 cout<<”\n Destructor”; 16 } 17 void inputdata(int n1, int n2 ) 18 { 19 a=n1; 20 b=n2 21 } 22 void display( ) 23 { 24 count<<”\n The numbers are”<<a<<b; 25 cout<<”\n The Sum=”<<a+b 26 } 27 }; 28 void main{ } 29 { 30 sum s; 31 s.inputdata(10, 20) 32 display( ); 33 } ;

Page 195: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

195 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

Line No Wrong Code Correct Code

1

2

3

5

6

7

11

13

20

25

28

31

32

#include<oistream.h>

^include<conio.h>

class sum( )

private;

Int a=b=0; public;

cout>>”\n Constructor”; ~~sum( ) b=n2 cout<<”\n The Sum=”<<a+b void main{ } s.inputdata(10, 20) display( );

#include<iostream.h> #include<conio.h> class sum private: int a=b=0; public: cout<<”\n Constructor”; ~sum( ) b=n2; cout<<”\n The Sum=”<<a+b; void main( ) s.inputdata(10, 20); s.display( );

Page 196: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

196 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

5. Debug the following C++ program to get the output.

1 ^include<iostream.h> 2 #include<conio.h> 3 class base 4 { 5 base ( ) 6 { 7 cout>>”\n Constructor of base class”; 8 } 9 ;base( ) 10 { 11 cout<<”\n Destructor base class” 12 } 13 }; 14 class derived1 : : public base 15 { 16 derived( ) 17 { 18 cout>>”\n Constructor of derived1”; 19 } 20 ~derived1( ) 21 { 22 cout<<”\n Destructor of derived1” 23 } 24 }; 25 class derived2: publicly derived1 26 { 27 derived2( ) 28 { 29 cout<<”\n Constructor of derived2”; 30 } 31 ^derived2( ) 32 { 33 cout<<”\n Destructor of derived2” 34 } 35 }; 36 void main[ ] 37 { 38 derived2 x 39 } 40 }

Page 197: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

197 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

Line No Wrong Code Correct Code

1

7

9

11

14

16

18

22

25

31

36

38

40

^include<iostream.h> cout>>”\n Contructor of base class”;

;base( ) cout<<”\n Destructor base class”

class derived1 : : public base

derived( ) cout>>”\n Constructor of derived1”;

cout<<”\n Destructor of derived1” class derived2: publicly derived1

^derived2( )

void main[ ]

derived2 x } Extra Open brace

#include<iostream.h> cout<<”\n Contructor of base class”;

~base( ) cout<<”\n Destructor base class”;

class derived1 : public base

derived1( ) cout<<”\n Contructor of derived1”;

cout<<”\n Destructor of derived1”; class derived2: public derived1

~derived2( )

void main( ) derived2 x;

Page 198: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

198 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

6. Debug the following C++ program to get the output.

1 #include<iosteam.h> 2 #include<conio.h> 3 class negative ( ) 4 { 5 PRIVATE: 6 Int i 7 public; 8 void accept( ); 9 { 10 cout>>”\n Enter the number”; 11 cin<<i; 12 } 13 void display( ) 14 { 15 COUT<<”\n The number is”<<i; 16 } 17 void operator-( ) 18 { 19 i=-i; 20 } 21 }; 22 VOID main( ) 23 { 24 negative n; 25 n.accept( ) 26 -n; 27 n.display ; 28 }

Page 199: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

199 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

Line No Wrong Code Correct Code

1

3

5

6

7

8

10

11

15

22

25

27

#include<iosteam.h> class negative ( ) PRIVATE: Int i public; void accept( ); cout>>”\n Enter the number”; cin<<i; COUT<<”\n The number is”<<i; VOID main( ) n.accept( ) n.display ;

#include<iostream.h> class negative private: int i; public: void accept( ) cout<<”\n Enter the number”; cin>>i; cout<<”\n The number is”<<i; void main( ) n.accept( ); n.display( );

Page 200: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

200 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

7. Debug the following C++ program to get the output.

1 #include<iostream.h> 2 #include<conio.h> 3 Class add 4 { 5 private 6 int sum 7 protected; 8 int num1,num2; 9 public: 10 add( ) 11 { 12 num1=num2=sum=0; 13 cout>>”\n Add Constructor”; 14 } 15 void accept( ) 16 { 17 cout>>”\n Enter the two numbers”; 18 cin<<num1<<num2; 19 } 20 void plus{ } 21 { 22 sum=num1+num2; 23 cout<<”\n The sum of the two numbers is”<<sum; 24 } 25 }; 26 class subtract ? public add 27 { 28 int sub 29 public; 30 subtract( ) 31 { 32 sub=0; 33 COUT<<”\n Subtract Constructor”; 34 } 35 void minus( ) 36 { 37 void add: :accept( ); 38 sub=num1-num2; 39 cout<<”\n The subtraction two number is”<<sub; 40 } 41 }; 42 void MAIN( ) 43 { 44 subtract s; 45 s.accept( ) 46 s.plus; 47 s.minus( ); 48 }

Page 201: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

201 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

Line No Wrong Code Correct Code

3

5

6

7

13

18

20

26

28

29

33

42

46

Class add private int sum protected; cout>>”\n Add Constructor”; cin<<num1<<num2; void plus{ }

class subtract ? public add int sub public; COUT<<”\n Subtract Constructor”;

void MAIN( ) s.plus;

class add private: int sum; protected: cout<<”\n Add Constructor”; cin>>num1>>num2; void plus( ) class subtract : public add int sub; public: cout<<”\n Subtract Constructor”; void main( ) s.plus( );

Page 202: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

202 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

8. Debug the following C++ program to get the output.

1 #include<iostream.h> 2 #include<conio.h> 3 class base 4 { 5 PUBLIC 6 base[ ] 7 { 8 cout>>”\n Constructor of base class”; 9 } 10 ^base( ) 11 { 12 cout<<”\n Destructor of base class”; 13 } 14 }; 15 class derived : : public base 16 { 17 public 18 derived2 ( ) 19 { 20 cout<< \n Constructor of derived class; 21 } 22 *derived( ) 23 { 24 Cout<<”\n Destructor of base class”; 25 } 26 } 27 void MAIN( ) 28 { 29 derived x; 30 }

Page 203: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

203 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

Line No Wrong Code Correct Code

5

6

8

15

17

18

22

24

26

27

PUBLIC base[ ] cout>>”\n Constructor of base class”;

class derived : : public base public derived2 ( ) *derived( ) Cout<<”\n Destructor of base class”; } void MAIN( )

public: base( ) cout<<”\n Constructor of base class”;

class derived : public base public: derived ( ) ~derived( ) cout<<”\n Destructor of base class”; }; void main( )

Page 204: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

204 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

9. Debug the following C++ program to get the output.

1 #include<iosteam.h> 2 $include<conio> 3 class simple 4 { 5 private 6 int a,b; 7 public: 8 simple ( ) 9 { 10 a=0 11 b=0; 12 cout<<”\n Constructor of class simple; 13 } 14 ~~simple( ) 15 { 16 cout>>”\n Destructor of class simple” 17 } 18 void getdata(int x, int y) 19 { 20 a=x; 21 b=x; 22 } 23 void putdata( ) 24 { 25 cout<<”\n The two integers are”>>a>>’\t’>>b; 26 cout<<”\n The sum of the variables are”>>a+b; 27 } 28 } 29 Void Main( ) 30 { 31 clrscr( ) 32 simple s; 33 s.getdata(5,6); 34 putdata( ); 35 }

Page 205: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

205 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

Line No

Wrong Code Correct Code

1

2

5

10

12

14

16

25

28

29

31

34

#include<iosteam.h> $include<conio> private a=0 cout<<”\n Constructor of class simple;

~~simple( ) cout>>”\n Destructor of class simple”

cout<<”\n The two integers are”>>a>>’\t’>>b;

} Void Main( ) clrscr( ) putdata( );

#include<iostream.h> #include<conio.h> private: a=0; cout<<”\n Constructor of class simple”;

~simple( ) cout<<”\n Destructor of class simple”;

cout<<”\n The two integers are”<<a<<’\t’<<b;

}; void main( ) clrscr( ); s.putdata( );

Page 206: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

206 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

10. Debug the following C++ program to get the output.

1 #include[iostream.h] 2 #include conio.h 3 CLASS simple 4 { 5 PRIVATE: 6 int a,b; 7 Public: 8 Simple [ ] 9 { 10 a=0; 11 b=0; 12 COUT<<”\n Constructor of class simple”; 13 } 14 !simple( ) 15 { 16 Cout<<”\n Destructor of class simple”; 17 } 18 void getdata[ ] 19 { 20 cout<<”\n Enter the values for a and b” 21 cin<<a<<b; 22 } 23 void putdata( ); 24 { 25 cout<”\n The two integers are”<<a<<’\t’<<b; 26 cout<<”\n The sum of the integers are”<<a+b; 27 } 28 }; 29 void MAIN( ) 30 { 31 simp s; 32 s.getdata( ) 33 s.putdata( ); 34 } 35 }

Page 207: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

207 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

Line No

Wrong Code Correct Code

1

2

3

5

7

8

12

14

16

18

20

21

29

31

32

35

#include[iostream.h] #include conio.h CLASS simple PRIVATE: Public: Simple [ ] COUT<<”\n Constructor of class simple”;

!simple( ) Cout<<”\n Destructor of class simple”;

void getdata[ ] cout<<”\n Enter the values for a and b”

cin<<a<<b; void MAIN( ) simp s; s.getdata( ) }

#include<iostream.h> #include <conio.h> class simple private: public: simple( ) cout<<”\n Constructor of class simple”;

~simple( ) cout<<”\n Destructor of class simple”;

void getdata( ) cout<<”\n Enter the values for a and b”;

cin>>a>>b; void main( ) simple s; s.getdata( );

Page 208: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

208 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

11. Debug the following C++ program to get the output.

1 $include<iostream.h> 2 #include[conio.h] 3 class base 4 [ 5 PUBLIC: 6 base [ ] 7 { 8 cout>>”\n Constructor of base class”; 9 } 10 ^base( ) 11 { 12 cout<<”\n Destructor of base class 13 } 14 ]; 15 class derived : : public baseclass 16 { 17 public 18 DERIVED( ) 19 { 20 cout<<”\n Constructor of derived; 21 } 22 ! derived( ) 23 { 24 cout>>\n Destructor of derived; 25 } 26 }; 27 Void main { } 28 { 29 derived x; 30 } 31 }

Page 209: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

209 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

Line No

Wrong Code Correct Code

1

4

5

6

8

10

12

14

15

17

18

20

22

24

27

31

$include<iostream.h> [ PUBLIC: base [ ] cout>>”\n Constructor of base class”;

^base( ) cout<<”\n Destructor of base class ]; class derived : : public baseclass public DERIVED( ) cout<<”\n Constructor of derived; ! derived( ) cout>>\n Destructor of derived; Void main { } }

#include<iostream.h> { public: base( ) cout<<”\n Constructor of base class”;

~base( ) cout<<”\n Destructor of base class”; }; class derived : public base public: derived( ) cout<<”\n Constructor of derived”; ~ derived( ) cout<<”\n Destructor of derived”; void main( )

Page 210: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

210 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

12. Debug the following C++ program to get the output.

1 #include[iostream.h] 2 %include<conio.h> 3 class student 4 { 5 Private: 6 int rno,mark1,mar2,total; 7 char name[25]; 8 Protected; 9 void accept{ } 10 { 11 Cout<<”\n Enter the details 12 Cin>>rno>>name<<mark1<<mark2; 13 } 14 void compute[ ] 15 { 16 total=mark1+mark2; 17 } 18 void display ( ) 19 { 20 cout<<”\n Name:”<<name; 21 cout>>”\n Roll No:”<<rno 22 cout<<”\n Mark1:”<<mark1; 23 cout>>”\n Mark2:”<<mark2; 24 cout<<”\n Total:”<<total 25 } 26 Public; 27 void execute( ) 28 { 29 accept( ); 30 compute( ); 31 dislplay( ); 32 } 33 }; 34 35 Void main [ ] 36 [ 37 student s; 38 s.execute( ) 39 }

Page 211: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

211 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

Line No

Wrong Code Correct Code

1

2

5

8

9

11

12

14

21

23

24

26

35

36

38

#include[iostream.h] %include<conio.h> Private: Protected; void accept{ } Cout<<”\n Enter the details Cin>>rno>>name<<mark1<<mark2; void compute[ ] cout>>”\n Roll No:”<<rno cout>>”\n Mark2:”<<mark2; cout<<”\n Total:”<<total Public; Void main [ ] [ s.execute( )

#include<iostream.h> #include<conio.h> private: protected: void accept( ) cout<<”\n Enter the details”; cin>>rno>>name>>mark1>>mark2; void compute( ) cout<<”\n Roll No:”<<rno; cout<<”\n Mark2:”<<mark2; cout<<”\n Total:”<<total; public: void main( ) { s.execute( );

Page 212: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

212 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

Question No:110

1. Find the output for the following program.

#include<iostream.h> #include<conio.h> class simple { private: int a,b; public: simple ( ) { a=0; b=0; cout<<”\n Constructor of class simple”; } ~Simple( ) { cout<<”\n Destructor of class simple”; } void getdata( ) { cout<<”\n Enter the values for a and b” cin>>a>>b; } void putdata( ) { cout<”\n The two integers are”<<a<<’\t’<<b; cout<<”\n The sum of the integers are”<<a+b; } }; void main( ) { simple s; s.getdata( ) s.putdata( ); }

Output:

Constructor of class simple

Enter the values for a and b

10 20

The two integers are 10 20

The sum of the variables are 30

Destructor of class simple

Page 213: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

213 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

2. Find the output for the following program.

#include<iostream.h> #include<conio.h> class base { public: base ( ) { cout<<”\n Constructor of base class”; } ~base( ) { cout<<”\n Destructor of base class”; } }; class derived : public base { public derived( ) { cout<<”\n Constructor of derived”; } ~derived( ) { cout<<”\n Destructor of derived”; } }; void main ( ) { derived x; }

Output:

Constructor of base class

Constructor of derived

Destructor of derived

Destructor of base class

Page 214: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

214 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

3. Find the output for the following program.

#include<iostream.h> #include<conio.h> class simple { private: int a,b; public: simple ( ) { a=0; b=0; cout<<”\n HELLO”; } ~Simple( ) { cout<<”\n BYE”; } void getdata( ) { cout<<”\n VALUES FOR A AND B” a=10; b=20; } void putdata( ) { cout<”\n THE TWO INTEGERS ARE”<<a<<’\t’<<b; cout<<”\n THE SUM IS”<<a+b; } }; void main( ) { simple s; s.getdata( ) s.putdata( ); }

Output:

HELLO

VALUES FOR A AND B

THE TWO INTEGERS ARE 10 20

THE SUM IS 30

BYE

Page 215: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

215 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

4. Find the output for the following program.

#include<iostream.h> #include<conio.h> class simple { private: int a,b; public: simple(int x, int y) { a=x; b=y; } ~simple( ) { cout<<”\n Destructor”; } void putdata( ) { cout<<”A=”<<a<<”\n”; cout<<”B=<<b; } }; void main( ) { clrscr( ); simple s(5,6); s.putdata( ); getch( ); }

Output:

A=5

B=6

Destructor

Page 216: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

216 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

5. Find the output for the following program.

#include<iostream.h> #include<conio.h> Class distance { int feet, inches; public: void distance_assign( int f, int i) { feet=f; inches=i; } void display( ) { cout<<”\n Feet :”<<feet<<”\t Inches :”<<inches; } distance operator+(distance d2) { distance d3; d3.feet=feet+d2.feet; d3.inches=(inches+d2.inches)%12; d3.feet+=(inches+d2.inches)/12; return d3; } }; void main( ) { clrscr( ); distance dist_1,dist_2; dist_1.distance_assign(12,11); dist_2.distance_assign(24,5); distance dist_3=dist_1+dist_2; dist_1.display( ); dist_2.display( ); dist_3.display( ); getch( ); }

Output:

Feet : 12 Inches:11

Feet : 24 Inches: 5

Feet : 37 Inches : 4

Page 217: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

217 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

6. Find the output for the following program.

#include<iostream.h> #include<conio.h> class base { base ( ) { cout<<”\n Contructor of base class”; } ~base( ) { cout<<”\n Destructor base class”; } }; class derived1 : public base { derived1( ) { cout<<”\n Contructor of derived1”; } ~derived1( ) { cout<<”\n Destructor of derived1”; } }; class derived2: public derived1 { derived2( ) { cout<<”\n Constructor of derived2”; } ~derived2( ) { cout<<”\n Destructor of derived2”; } }; void main( ) { derived2 x; }

Output:

Constructor of base class

Constructor of derived1

Constructor of derived2

Destructor of derived2

Destructor of derived1

Destructor of base class

Page 218: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

218 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

7. Find the output for the following program.

#include<iostream.h> #include<conio.h> class add { private: int sum; protected: int num1,num2; public: add( ) { num1=num2=sum=0; cout<<”\n Add Constructor”; } void accept( ) { cout<<”\n Enter the two numbers”; cin>>num1>>num2; } void plus( ) { sum=num1+num2; cout<<”\n The sum of the two numbers is”<<sum; } }; class subtract : public add { int sub; public; subtract( ) { sub=0; cout<<”\n Subtract Constructor”; } void minus( ) { void add: :accept( ); sub=num1-num2; cout<<”\n The subtraction of two number is”<<sub; } }; void main( ) { subtract s; s.accept( ); s.plus( ); s.minus( ); }

Output: Add Constructor Subtract Constructor Enter the two numbers 20 10 The sum of the two numbers is 30 The subtraction of two umber is 10

Page 219: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

219 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

8. Find the output for the following program.

#include<iostream.h> #include<conio.h> Class product { private: int x,y; public: product( ) { x=0; y=0; cout<<”\n Constructor of class product”; } ~product( ) { cout<<”\n Destructor of class product”; } void getdata( ) { x=5; y=10; } void display( ) { cout<<”\n The two integers are”<<x<<’\t’<<y; cout<<”\n The product of two integers are”<<x*y; } }; void main( ) { product p; p.getdata( ); p.display( ); }

Output:

Constructor of class product

The two integers are 5 10

The product of two integers are 50

Destructor of class product

Page 220: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

220 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

9. Find the output for the following program.

#include<iostream.h> #include<conio.h> class simple { private: int a,b; public: simple ( ) { a=0; b=0; cout<<”\n Welcome”; } ~Simple( ) { cout<<”\n Good Bye”; } void getdata( ) { cout<<”\n values for a and b are 5 and 6” a=5, b=6; } void putdata( ) { cout<”\n The two integers are”<<a<<’\t’<<b; cout<<”\n The Sum is”<<a+b; } }; void main( ) { simple s; s.getdata( ) s.putdata( ); }

Output:

Welcome

Values for a and b are 5 and 6

The two integers are 5 6

The Sum is 11

Good Bye

Page 221: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

221 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

10. Find the output for the following program.

#include<iostream.h> #include<conio.h> Class add { int num1,num2,sum; public: add( ) { cout<<”\n Constructor without parameter”; num1=num2=sum=0; } add (int s1, int s2) { cout<<”\n Parametrized Constructor”; num1=s1; num2=s2; sum=NULL: } add( add &a) { cout<<”\n Copy Constructor”; num1=a.num1; num2=a.num2; sum=NULL; } void getdata( ) { num1=10; num2=20; } void putdata( ) { cout<<”\n The numbers are”; cout<<num1<<’\t’<<num2; sum=num1+num2; cout<<”\n The sum of the numbers”<<sum; } void main( ) { add a,b(5,6), c(b); a.getdata( ); cout<<”\n Object a:”; a.putdata( ); cout<<”\n Object b:”; b.putdata( ); cout<<”\n Object c:”; c.putdata( ); }

Output

Constructor without parameters

Parameterized Constructor

Copy Constructor

Object a:

The numbers are 10 20

The sum of the numbers are 30

Object b:

The numbers are 5 6

The sum of the numbers are 11

Object c:

The numbers are 5 6

The sum of the numbers are 11

Page 222: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

222 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

11. Find the output for the following program.

#include<iostream.h> #include<conio.h> class student { private: int rno,m1,m2,total; char name[25]; protected: void assign( ) { rno=5; strcpy(name,”Sri”); m1=78; m2=83 } void compute( ) { total=m1+2; } void display ( ) { cout<<”\n Name:”<<name; cout>>”\n Roll No:”<<rno cout<<”\n Mark1:”<<mark1; cout>>”\n Mark2:”<<mark2; cout<<”\n Total:”<<total } public: void execute( ) { accept( ); compute( ); dislplay( ); } }; void main ( ) { student s; s.execute( ) }

Output

Name : Sri

Roll No : 5

Mark1 : 78

Mark2 : 83

Total : 161

Page 223: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

223 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

12. Find the output for the following program.

#include<iostream.h> #include<conio.h> class sum { int a,b,s; public: sum( ) { cout<<”\n Constructor without parameters”; a=7; b=12; s=0; } sum( int x, int y) { cout<<”\n Parameterized Constructor”; a=x; b=y; s=0; } void addition( ) { s=a+b; } void display( ) { cout<<”\n The Numbers are”; cout<<a<<’\t’<<b; cout<<”\n The Sum=”<<s; } }; void main( ) { clrscr( ); sum p, q(15,18); p.addition( ); q.addition( ); cout<<”\n Object P”; p.display( ); cout<<”\n Object Q”; q.display( ); }

Output:

Constructor without parameters

Parametrized Constructor

Object P

The Numbers are 7 12

The Sum= 19

Object Q

The Numbers are 15 18

The Sum= 33

Page 224: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

224 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

Small Programs and its outputs [2 2 2 2 Marks] 2. Overview of the C++

#include<iostream.h>

#include<conio.h>

void main( )

{

int i=20;

cout<<i<<i++<<++i;

getch( );

}

Output:

22 21 21

1

#include<iostream.h>

#include<conio.h>

void main( )

{

int i=1,a=3;

i=a++;

cout<<i;

getch( );

}

Output:

3

2

#include<iostream.h>

#include<conio.h>

void main( )

{

int i=1,a=3;

i=++a;

cout<<i;

getch( );

}

Output:

4

3

#include<iostream.h>

#include<conio.h>

void main( )

{

int i=3,x;

x=i ? i++ : ++i;

cout<<x;

getch( );

}

Output:

4

#include<iostream.h>

#include<conio.h>

void main( )

{

int z,x=3,y=2;

z=--x+y++;

cout<<z;

getch( );

}

Output:

4

5

#include<iostream.h>

#include<conio.h>

void main( )

{

char ch=’a’;

ch=(ch==’b’) ? ch : ‘b’ ;

cout<<ch;

getch( );

}

Output:

b

6

Page 225: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

225 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

Debug the following programs

3. 3. 3. 3. Basic Statements

Invalid Construct

if a > b

if ( a > b)

a--;

cout<<”\n decremented”;

else

a++;

cout<<”\n Incremented”;

Error thrown by the compiler is

“Misplaced Else”.

If( a > b);

cout<<” Greater”;

else

cout<<” Lesser”;

Error thrown by the compiler is

“Misplaced Else”.

Valid Construct

if ( a>b )

Condition should always be enclosed in a

pair of brackets

if ( a > b)

{

a--;

cout<<”\n Decremented”;

}

else

{

a++;

cout<<”\n Incremented”;

}

If the action block is compound statements,

then it should be enclosed in curly braces

If( a > b)

cout<<” Greater”;

else

cout<<” Lesser”;

The semicolon don’t placed after the

condition.

#include<iostream.h>

#include<conio.h>

void main( )

{

float f=10.0;

int x=50;

cout<<x<<f

}

#include<iostream.h>

#include<conio.h>

void main( )

{

float f=10.0;

x=50;

cout<<x<<f

}

Page 226: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

226 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

Char name[ ]= “shiv”;

Switch(name)

{

case “shiv” : cout<<” Shiva Secured 1st Rank”;

break;

case “Rama”:cout<<”Rama Secured 2nd Rank”;

break;

}

Compiler throws an error “Switch selection expression must be of integral type” which

means that switch expression should be evaluate integer constant only (char, enum, int)

float value;

switch(value)

{

case 1.5: cout<<value-0.5;

break;

case 2.9: cout<<value+0.5;

break;

}

Value is of float type , hence not a valid switch expression.

Invalid Construct Invalid Construct

Switch(rank) switch(x)

{ {

case 1 to 2 :cout<<”\n Best Rank”; case 1 to 2: cout<<”One”<<”Two”;

break; break;

case 3 to 4 :cout<<”\n Good Rank”; case 3 to 4: cout<<”Three”<<”Four”;

break; }

}

Valid Construct Valid Construct switch(x) Switch(rank) {

{ case 1: cout<<”One”; break;

case 1:cout<<”\n Best Rank”; case 2:cout<<”Two”; break;

break; case 3:cout<<”Three”; break;

case 2:cout<<”\n Good Rank”; case 4: cout<<”Four”;

break; }

}

The following switch constructs are invalid because

Page 227: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

227 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

5.5.5.5.Arrays

What are the output of the following Program?

#inclue<iostream.h> Output:

void main( ) END

{

char ch[ ]={“ END”};

cout<<ch;

}

#include<iostream.h> Output:

void main( ) 1

{ 1

int a[ ]={1,2,3,4,5}; 1

for(int i=0;i<4;i++) 1

a[i+1]=a[i]; 1

for(i=0;i<5;i++)

cout<<’\n’<<a[i];

}

#include<iostream.h> Output:

#include<conio.h> JerryJ

void main( )

{

char name[ ]=”Jerry”;

int k=5;

for(int i=0;i<3;i++,k--)

name[k]=name[i];

cout<<name;

getch( );

}

#inclue<iostream.h> Output: void main( ) NULL

{

char ch[ ]={“ NULL \0” };

cout<<ch;

}

Page 228: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

228 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

What are the output of the following Program?

#inclue<iostream.h>

void main( )

{

char ch[ ]={‘C’ , ’O’ , ‘M’ , ‘P’ , ‘U’ , ‘T’ , ‘E’, ‘R’}; Output:

for(int i=0; i<8;i++) COMPUTERRETUPMOC

cout<<ch[i];

for(int j=7;j>=0;j--)

cout<<ch[j];

}

The size of a 2-D array is calculated as follows:

1. int sales[4][4];

Number of Elements = Rows x Columns

= 4 x 4

= 16

Memory Size = 16 x 2 (2 bytes is required for integer)

= 32 bytes

2. float [4][6];

Number of Elements = Rows x Columns

= 4 x 6

= 24

Memory Size = 24 x 4 (4 bytes is required for float)

= 96 bytes

3. char name[10][7];

Number of Elements = Rows x Columns

= 10 x 7

= 70

Memory Size = 70 x 1 (1 byte is required for char)

= 70 bytes

Page 229: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

229 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

8.8.8.8. Constructor and Destructor

The below programs are error. Say the reason. Error Program Correct Program

class simple

{

private:

int x;

simple( )

{

X=5;

}

};

class simple

{

private:

int x;

public: simple( )

{

X=5;

}

}; Constructor should be declared in public part

class simple

{

private:

int x;

public:

simple( int y)

{

x=y;

}

};

void main( )

{

simple s;

}

class simple

{

private:

int x;

public:

simple( int y)

{

x=y;

}

};

void main( )

{

simple s(10); }

class simple

{

private:

int x;

public:

simple(int y)

{

x=y;

}

simple(int z=5)

{

x=z;

}

};

void main( )

{

Simple s(6);

}

class simple

{

private:

int x;

public:

simple(int y)

{

x=y;

}

simple(int z) {

x=z;

}

};

void main( )

{

Simple s(6);

}

Page 230: Volume-I [Star Office] · M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476  1  Volume-I [Star Office] 1. Which is the grouped together into an integrated

M.S.ALLAH BAKSH.,M.Sc.,B.Ed., MOBILE:9994368476 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN

230 WWW.TNBEDCSVIPS.IN